4. 地遍详说的注释
4. Pathavīkasiṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
5151. “安乐”:因为得到合适的住处等,作意就变得安适,有利于修习。“净化者”:以切断那些一个个症结所在的方式而净化。“不疲劳地”:身体确实不疲劳。意思是:如果身体疲劳,就会成为业处作意的障碍。“症结所在”:从义理和意向上说,因为难以通达而成为症结的地方。“切断”:通过如实阐明义理和意向而切断,也就是使其明显、非常清楚,这是意旨。“极清净”:非常清净,意思是无丛聚、无缠结。
51.Phāsuhotīti āvāsasappāyādilābhena manasikāraphāsutā bhāvanānukūlatā hoti. Parisodhentenāti tesaṃ tesaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānānaṃ chindanavasena visodhentena. Akilamantoyevāti akilantakāyo eva. Sati hi kāyakilamathe siyā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa antarāyoti adhippāyo. Gaṇṭhiṭṭhānanti atthato, adhippāyato ca dubbinivedhatāya gaṇṭhibhūtaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Chinditvāti yāthāvato atthassa, adhippāyassa ca vibhāvanena chinditvā, vibhūtaṃ supākaṭaṃ katvāti adhippāyo. Suvisuddhanti suṭṭhu visuddhaṃ, nigumbaṃ nijjaṭanti attho.
不适宜住处的注释
Ananurūpavihāravaṇṇanā
52“由某一位”是指哪怕只由一位,更何况由许多位,这是本意。“大性”就是大的状态。其余各处也同理。“Soṇḍavā”就是酒肆。在“叶”等词中也一样。在菩提园等处应当做的事,这里指的是“义务”,所以说“水瓶或空的”。“已耗尽”是指由于布施给一个又一个进来的人而耗尽。即使在破旧的寺院里,如果比丘们这样说:“尊者,请随意修习沙门法,我们会照料。”在这样的地方也应当住。这一做法也是可以采用的,但由于已经说过的方式,所以这里没有说。
52.Aññatarenāti aññatarenāpi, pageva anekehīti adhippāyo. Mahantabhāvo mahattaṃ. Tathā sesesu. Soṇḍavā soṇḍī. Tathā paṇṇantiādīsu. Bodhiaṅgaṇādīsu kātabbaṃ idha ‘‘vatta’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘pānīyaghaṭaṃ vā ritta’’nti. Niṭṭhitāyāti paviṭṭhapaviṭṭhānaṃ dānena parikkhīṇāya. Jiṇṇavihārepi yatra bhikkhū evaṃ vadanti ‘‘āyasmā, yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karotu, mayaṃ paṭijaggissāmā’’ti. Evarūpe vihātabbanti ayampi nayo labbhati, vuttanayattā pana na vutto.
在大路精舍,就是指靠近大路的精舍。染衣容器、木材、木槽等,是指染衣的容器、染衣用的木材、木制的染槽、煮染的地方、洗木板等这些东西。采蔬女,就是采集蔬菜的女人。他们说不相应的声音,是指与欲乐相关的歌声,就算只是女人的声音,也还是属于不相应的声音。在那里,就是指有花的精舍里。同样的情况,就是像在有叶子的精舍里所说的“在那里取业处”等过患那样,完全一样。不过这里应当说“采花女们正在摘花”,这是这里的差别。
Mahāpathavihāreti mahāpathasamīpe vihāre. Bhājanadārudoṇikādīnīti rajanabhājanāni, rajanatthāya dāru, dārumayadoṇikā, rajanapacanaṭṭhānaṃ, dhovanaphalakanti evamādīni. Sākahārikāti sākahāriniyo itthiyo. Visabhāgasaddo kāmaguṇūpasaṃhito gītasaddoti vadanti, kevalopi itthisaddo visabhāgasaddo eva. Tatrāti pupphavante vihāre. Tādisoyevāti ‘‘tatthassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā’’tiādinā yādiso paṇṇavante vihāre upaddavo vutto, tādisoyeva. ‘‘Pupphahārikāyo pupphaṃ ocinantiyo’’ti pana vattabbaṃ. Ayamidha viseso.
Patthanīya的意思是:在那里居住者当中,出于敬重,应当以前往拜访等方式去希求。因此说“被视为庇护所”。Dakkhiṇāgirī,他们说是位于摩揭陀国境内的南山。
Patthanīyeti tattha vasantesu sambhāvanāvasena upasaṅkamanādinā patthetabbe. Tenāha ‘‘leṇasammate’’ti. Dakkhiṇāgirīti magadhavisaye dakkhiṇāgirīti vadanti.
异类所缘,即可意与不可意者。为了显示不可意的所缘,才说了“用罐子刮擦”等话。适合做木制器具的树,就是木制器具树。
Visabhāgārammaṇāni iṭṭhāni, aniṭṭhāni ca. Aniṭṭhānaṃ hi dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ghaṭehi nighaṃsantiyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dabbūpakaraṇayoggā rukkhā dabbūpakaraṇarukkhā.
再说“精舍”这个词。“打谷场”是指晒打谷物的场地。人们阻挡牛群,说“它们吃了庄稼!”“水闸”是指在田地里为庄稼放水的水口。“这个也是”是说,这精舍也是属于大僧团的财产。被修习业处的比丘所阻止。
Yo pana vihāro. Khalanti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Gāvo rundhanti ‘‘sassaṃ khādiṃsū’’ti. Udakavāranti kedāresu sassānaṃ dātabbaudakavāraṃ. Ayampīti mahāsaṅghabhogopi vihāro. Vāriyamānā kammaṭṭhānikena bhikkhunā.
靠海、靠临海河流的水港,以及作为大城市入口、靠近森林入口等处的陆港。没有净信。他的意思是,因此他在那里住不安稳。国王手下的人想着。
Samuddasāmuddikanadīnissitaṃ udakapaṭṭanaṃ. Mahānagarānaṃ āyadvārabhūtaṃ aṭavimukhādinissitaṃ thalapaṭṭanaṃ. Appasannā honti. Tenassa tattha phāsuvihāro na hotīti adhippāyo. Maññamānā rājamanussā.
Samosaraṇena是指从这里到那里来回走动。Papāteti是指站在悬崖顶上唱道:“用歌声使来到这里的人坠入悬崖后,我就把他吃掉。”Vegena gahetvāti是指迅速赶过来,抓住肩膀问道:“你去哪里?”
Samosaraṇenāti ito cito sañcaraṇena. Papāteti papātasīse ṭhatvā gāyi ‘‘gītasaddena idhāgataṃ papāte pātetvā khādissāmī’’ti. Vegena gahetvāti vegenāgantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ yāsī’’ti khandhe gahetvā.
所谓“Yattha”,是指:在某个精舍里,或者在精舍附近,如果没办法遇到善友,那么在那个精舍中,这种“得不到善友”就是很大的过失。经文就是这样连接的。
Yatthāti yasmiṃ vihāre, vihārasāmantā vā na sakkā hoti kalyāṇamittaṃ laddhuṃ, tattha vihāre so alābho mahādosoti yojanā.
“道路住者”:被安置在道路上、依道路而行,就是“道路住者”,即依止道路的精舍。那就是“道路住者”。“酒肆住者”:与酒肆共住的精舍就是“酒肆住者”,那就是“酒肆住者”。“叶”等词也是这样。依止城市的,称为“城市”,这是省略后半个词来说的,就像“怖军”被称为“怖”一样。“木材的”:指与依止木材的共住。“不相应的”:被不相应者所住,或者是不相应者的住处,那样的精舍就是“不相应”。与那不相应的共住。依止边地的、依止界内的以及不适业的,合起来就是“边地界内不适业”。在哪里得不到善友,那里也……因为处处都指向“处”这个词,所以用中性词来表达。这样了知之后,即了知“对修习不适宜”。
Panthaninti panthe nīto pavattitoti panthanī, magganissito vihāro. Taṃ panthaniṃ. Soṇḍinti soṇḍisahito vihāro soṇḍī, taṃ soṇḍiṃ. Tathā paṇṇantiādīsu. Nagaranissitaṃ nagaranti vuttaṃ uttarapadalopena yathā ‘‘bhīmaseno bhīmo’’ti. Dārunāti dārunissitena saha. Visabhāgenāti yo visabhāgehi vusīyati, visabhāgānaṃ vā nivāso, so vihāro visabhāgo. Tena visabhāgena saddhiṃ. Paccantanissitañca sīmānissitañca asappāyañca paccantasīmāsappāyaṃ. Yattha mitto na labbhati, tampīti sabbattha ṭhāna-saddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Iti viññāyāti ‘‘bhāvanāya ananurūpānī’’ti evaṃ vijānitvā.
相应住处之注释
Anurūpavihāravaṇṇanā
53这个住处叫作“适合的”,意思是:这个住处适合修习。不太远,是说从行境处算起,不到半俱卢舍,所以不太远。不太近,是说按最低限度,从行境处算起有五百弓的距离,所以不太近。又因为不太远也不太近,行境处的道路没有危险等,而且来去都很合适,所以具足来去便利。白天没有大众聚集,所以白天不嘈杂。这里的“少”(appa)是“没有”的意思,就像“少欲”等词里的用法一样。夜里没有人们谈话的声音,所以夜里声音少。任何时候都没有众人聚集的喧闹声,所以没有喧闹。少费力,就是不费力、轻松地。因为戒等功德坚固,所以是长老。因为多闻经、应颂等,所以是多闻者。因为能诵持,又能如法地从师长那里学来,所以教法传承已至其身,也就是具有教法传承。因为能受持经和论所摄的法,所以是持法者。因为能受持律,所以是持律者。因为能受持那些法和律的纲目,所以是持论母者。在那里,以法提问而提问;以义提问而探究、思择、审察。这是显示“尊者,这是怎么回事?它是什么意思?”这样的提问和探究方式。对于巴利圣典中未显明的义理,通过引用其他段落的巴利文,从教法传承上加以阐明;对于未清晰之处,通过显示理趣使之清晰。对于那些令人疑惑的法,即成为症结所在的巴利段落,通过如实决断来消除疑惑。在这里,“不太远、不太近、具足来去便利”是一支;“白天不嘈杂、夜里声音少、没有喧闹”是一支;“没有蚊、虻、风、热、爬虫的接触”是一支;“又,住在那住处时……资具”是一支;“又,在那住处有长老……消除疑惑”是一支。应当知道这样共有五支。
53.Ayaṃanurūpo nāmāti ayaṃ vihāro bhāvanāya anurūpo nāma. Nātidūranti gocaraṭṭhānato aḍḍhagāvutato orabhāgatāya na atidūraṃ. Nāccāsannanti pacchimena pamāṇena gocaraṭṭhānato pañcadhanusatikatāya na atiāsannaṃ. Tāya ca pana nātidūranāccāsannatāya, gocaraṭṭhānaṃ parissayādirahitamaggatāya ca gamanassa ca āgamanassa ca yuttarūpattā gamanāgamanasampannaṃ. Divasabhāge mahājanasaṃkiṇṇatābhāvena divā appākiṇṇaṃ. Abhāvattho hi ayaṃ appa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.336) viya. Rattiyaṃ janālāpasaddābhāvena rattiṃ appasaddaṃ. Sabbadāpi janasannipātanigghosābhāvena appanigghosaṃ. Appakasirenāti akasirena sukheneva. Sīlādiguṇānaṃ thirabhāvappattiyā therā. Suttageyyādi bahu sutaṃ etesanti bahussutā. Vācuggatakaraṇena, sammadeva garūnaṃ santike āgamitabhāvena ca āgato pariyattidhammasaṅkhāto āgamo etesanti āgatāgamā. Suttābhidhammasaṅkhātassa dhammassa dhāraṇena dhammadharā. Vinayassa dhāraṇena vinayadharā. Tesaṃyeva dhammavinayānaṃ mātikāya dhāraṇena mātikādharā. Tattha tattha dhammaparipucchāya paripucchati. Atthaparipucchāya paripañhati vīmaṃsati vicāreti. Idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ imassa ko atthoti paripucchanaparipañhākāradassanaṃ. Avivaṭañceva pāḷiyā atthaṃ padesantarapāḷidassanena āgamato vivaranti. Anuttānīkatañca yuttivibhāvanena uttānīkaronti. Kaṅkhaṭṭhāniyesu dhammesu saṃsayuppattiyā hetutāya gaṇṭhiṭṭhānabhūtesu pāḷipadesesu yāthāvato vinicchayadānena kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Ettha ca ‘‘nātidūraṃ, nāccāsannaṃ, gamanāgamanasampanna’’nti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘divā appākiṇṇaṃ, rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa…pe… parikkhārā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā…pe… kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodentī’’ti ekaṃ. Evaṃ pañca aṅgāni veditabbāni.
小障碍的注释
Khuddakapalibodhavaṇṇanā
54第五十四,断除小障碍的用意,后面会讲到。或者做加固处理,比如装门闩、修通风口、涂抹地面等;或者做缝补工作,比如断线等处要缝合。
54. Khuddakapalibodhupacchede payojanaṃ parato āgamissati. Aggaḷaanuvātaparibhaṇḍadānādinā daḷhīkammaṃ vā. Tantacchedādīsu tunnakammaṃ vā kātabbaṃ.
修习方法的注释
Bhāvanāvidhānavaṇṇanā
55依一切业处:就是依照接下来依次说明的全部四十种业处。从乞食返回:就是从受用乞食之后回来,意思是吃完饭、收好钵、放下手的时候。消除食后倦怠:就是消除因吃饭而产生的疲劳。因为食物刚进到胃里时,由于是新食的缘故,身体大多数情况下会有某种疲劳,要把这种疲劳平息下去。如果这种疲劳没有平息,心就会因为身体疲倦而无法得到专一。于远离处:就是人迹罕至的地方。安乐而坐:就是盘腿坐好,把身体端正,以安稳的坐姿坐着。因为已说:就是“或于所作……”等句里所说的取地相,这在古注中已经说过了。
55.Sabbakammaṭṭhānavasenāti anukkamena niddisiyamānassa cattālīsavidhassa sabbassa kammaṭṭhānassa vasena. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantenāti piṇḍapātaparibhogato paṭinivattena, piṇḍapātabhuttāvinā onītapattapāṇināti attho. Bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvāti bhojananimittaṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā. Āhāre hi āsayaṃ paviṭṭhamatte tassa āgantukatāya yebhuyyena siyā sarīrassa koci parissamo, taṃ vūpasametvā. Tasmiṃ hi avūpasante sarīrakhedena cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labheyyāti. Pavivitteti janavivitte. Sukhanisinnenāti pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya nisajjāya sukhanisinnena. Vuttañhetanti yaṃ ‘‘katāya vā’’tiādinā pathaviyā nimittaggahaṇaṃ idha vuccati, vuttaṃ hetaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
现在,为了说明那段注疏的巴利文,说了“修习地遍的人”等话。这里的简要含义是:“修习地遍的人”,就是以取相的方式执取地遍、开始着手,意思是生起作为取相的地遍。这里所说的“生起”,应当理解为让那样的相现前。“在地上面”,是指在后面将要说明的特定地轮上。“取相”,是指在那里以修行智取后面将要说明的特定地相,就像用眼睛在镜面上取面容的影像一样。虽然说的是“在地上面”,但因为是就圆轮而言,所以用了中性词来表达。“所作”,是指依后文将说明的方法作成;“非所作”,是指于天然的打谷场、广场等地面;“有边际”,是指具有边际、具有界限的意思,这确实是一个限定词。为了说明由彼所排除的,所以说“非无边际”。“有端”,等等,也都是它的同义词。“或”字有不定之义。“如箕量”等中,是指如箕、如碟那样大小合意。然而有些人说:“碟量是一拃四指,箕量是比那更大的量。人造的遍曼陀罗以底部界限为碟量,以上部界限为箕量,不在这以下或以上,为了摄受有限量之差别,所以说‘如箕量或如碟量’。”在如显现的所缘上,即使增大一指量,也仍然是无量的,这就是所说的含义。然而有些人说:“遍曼陀罗应当做成如伞盖量。”
Idāni taṃ aṭṭhakathāpāḷiṃ dassento ‘‘pathavīkasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto’’tiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – pathavīkasiṇaṃ uggaṇhantoti uggahanimittabhāvena pathavīkasiṇaṃ gaṇhanto ādiyanto, uggahanimittabhūtaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ uppādentoti attho. Uppādanañcettha tathānimittassa upaṭṭhāpanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pathaviyanti vakkhamānavisese pathavīmaṇḍale. Nimittaṃ gaṇhātīti tattha cakkhunā ādāsatale mukhanimittaṃ viya bhāvanāñāṇena vakkhamānavisesaṃ pathavīnimittaṃ gaṇhāti. ‘‘Pathaviya’’nti vatvāpi maṇḍalāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Kateti vakkhamānavidhinā abhisaṅkhateti attho. Vā-saddo aniyamattho. Akateti pākatike khalamaṇḍalādike pathavīmaṇḍale. Sāntaketi saantake eva, saparicchede evāti attho. Sāvadhāraṇañhetaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā hi tena nivattitaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no anantake’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakoṭiyetiādīnipi tasseva vevacanāni. Suppamatte vātiādīsu suppasarāvāni samappamāṇāni icchitāni. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘sarāvamattaṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ hoti, suppamattaṃ tato adhikappamāṇanti. Kittimaṃ kasiṇamaṇḍalaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedena sarāvamattaṃ, uparimaparicchedena suppamattaṃ, na tato adho, uddhaṃ vāti parittappamāṇabhedasaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā’ti vutta’’nti. Yathāupaṭṭhite ārammaṇe ekaṅgulamattampi vaḍḍhitaṃ appamāṇamevāti vuttovāyamattho. Keci pana ‘‘chattamattampi kasiṇamaṇḍalaṃ kātabba’’nti vadanti.
那位修瑜伽的人把地轮这个相好好地取好,这就是“善取相”。当他睁开眼睛看,取了这个相,再闭上眼睛作意时,那个相就像睁眼观看的那一刻一样现前,这时候就叫“善取”。然后,他在这个相上把念清楚地安立起来,心不外散,反复地观察,这就叫“善持”。这样善持之后,他再反复作意、用心思惟,只以这个相为所缘,不断修习、培养、多修,这就叫“善确定”。所谓“于彼所缘”,就是指通过这样善取等步骤,正确地让那个叫做地遍的所缘现前。“系心”是指把自己的心引到近行定,绑在那个所缘上,让它从别的所缘转回来。“必定以此”等话,是在说明这样做的好处。
Sotaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitaṃ karotīti so yogāvacaro taṃ pathavīmaṇḍalaṃ suggahitaṃ nimittaṃ karoti. Yadā cakkhuṃ ummīletvā oloketvā tattha nimittaṃ gahetvā nimmīletvā āvajjentassa ummīletvā olokitakkhaṇe viya upaṭṭhāti, tadā suggahitaṃ karoti nāma. Athettha satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā abahigatena mānasena punappunaṃ sallakkhento sūpadhāritaṃ upadhāreti nāma. Evaṃ upadhāritaṃ pana naṃ punappunaṃ āvajjento manasi karonto tamevārabbha āsevanaṃ bhāvanaṃ bahulaṃ pavattento suvavatthitaṃ vavatthapeti nāma. Tasmiṃ ārammaṇeti evaṃ suggahitakaraṇādinā sammadeva upaṭṭhite tasmiṃ pathavīkasiṇasaññite ārammaṇe. Cittaṃ upanibandhatīti attano cittaṃ upacārajjhānaṃ upanetvā nibandhati aññārammaṇato vinivattaṃ karoti. Addhā imāyātiādi ānisaṃsadassāvitādassanaṃ.
现在,为了通过阐明前面所展示的注疏文句的含义,同时详细说明修行方法,他想先说明在未制作[遍轮]时取相的情形,于是说了“其中,那位在过去世也……”等话。其中,“tattha”就是指那段注疏文句。“四禅与五禅”是依照四禅和五禅这两种方式来说的。“有福德者”是指具有修行所成福德的人。“具足亲依止者”是指具备这种亲依止的人。“在打谷场”是指圆形的打谷之处。“即观察处之量”就是指所观察处的大小范围。
Idāni yathādassitassa aṭṭhakathāpāṭhassa atthappakāsanena saddhiṃ bhāvanāvidhiṃ vibhāvetukāmo akate tāva nimittaggahaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘tattha yena atītabhavepī’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ aṭṭhakathāpāṭhe. Catukkapañcakajjhānānīti catukkapañcakanayavasena vadati. Puññavatoti bhāvanāmayapuññavato. Upanissayasampannassāti tādiseneva upanissayena samannāgatassa. Khalamaṇḍaleti maṇḍalākāre dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne. Taṃṭhānappamāṇamevāti olokitaṭṭhānappamāṇameva.
没有违失,就是没有违背,完全按照前面所说的方式去做。所谓“以青、黄、红、白混合”,是指用青色等颜色的泥土,分别地、也混合地和合在一起。所谓“恒河之流”,就是恒河的水流。据说在锡兰岛上有一条叫罗婆那恒河的河,在那条河的水流冲断河岸的地方,泥土呈红褐色。针对这一点,才说“如恒河之流中泥土般的红褐色”。红褐色,就是红褐色调、带有红色光泽,意思是具有红色光彩的颜色。
Avirādhetvāti avirajjhitvā vuttavidhinā eva. Nīlapītalohitaodātasambhedavasenāti nīlādivaṇṇāhi mattikāhi paccekaṃ, ekajjhañca saṃsaggavasena. Gaṅgāvaheti gaṅgāsote. Sīhaḷadīpe kira rāvaṇagaṅgā nāma nadī, tassā sotena chinnataṭaṭṭhāne mattikā aruṇavaṇṇā. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘gaṅgāvahe mattikāsadisāya aruṇavaṇṇāyā’’ti. Aruṇavaṇṇāya aruṇanibhāya, aruṇappabhāvaṇṇāyāti attho.
像这样指出了遍的过失之后,现在为了说明制作遍等其他方式,说了“而那……”这一段。“可携带的”是指可以收起来带着走的。“置于彼处的”是指在哪里制作,就留在那里不动的。“所说之量”是指“簸箕大小或盘子大小”所说的那个尺寸。“圆形”是指圆盘那样的形状。“在遍作之时”是指为了取相而修习的时候。“正是此”是说以一拃四指宽为准,正是依据这个尺寸,才说“簸箕大小或盘子大小”。因为簸箕不会太大,而盘子则大一些,大到能盖住大瓮口,所以两者大小相当。
Evaṃ kasiṇadose dassetvā idāni kasiṇakaraṇādike sesākāre dassetuṃ ‘‘tañca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃhārimanti saṃharitabbaṃ gahetvā caraṇayoggaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakanti yatra kataṃ, tattheva tiṭṭhanakaṃ. Vuttappamāṇanti ‘‘suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā’’ti vuttappamāṇaṃ. Vaṭṭanti maṇḍalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Parikammakāleti nimittuggahaṇāya bhāvanākāle. Etadevāti yaṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulavitthāraṃ, etadeva pamāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘suppamattaṃ vā sarāvamattaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Suppaṃ hi nātimahantaṃ, sarāvañca mahantaṃ cāṭipidhānappahonakanti samappamāṇaṃ hoti.
56“因此”这句话,是因为前面是为了作限定而说的。所谓“如此限定所说之量”,就是按照所说的量——一拃四指宽——来作限定;或者按照所说的量,用不同的颜色对遍轮作限定。“木抹刀”是指紫檀之类的木抹刀,它会产生与红褐色不同的颜色,所以说“不取它”。“普通木抹刀”则和石抹刀差不多,因为没有凹凸不平的地方,所以把它弄得像鼓面一样平坦。“于更远处”等,是说明相对于所说的地点和座位,在其他地方存在的过患。“遍的过失”是指手印、脚印等,在这里就是遍的过失。
56.Tasmāti paricchedatthāya vuttattā. Evaṃ vuttapamāṇaṃ paricchedanti yathāvuttappamāṇaṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulavitthāraṃ paricchedaṃ katvā, evaṃ vuttappamāṇaṃ vā kasiṇamaṇḍalaṃ visabhāgavaṇṇena paricchedaṃ katvā. Rukkhapāṇikāti kucandanādirukkhapāṇikā aruṇavaṇṇassa visabhāgavaṇṇaṃ samuṭṭhapeti. Tasmā taṃ aggahetvāti vuttaṃ. Pakatirukkhapāṇikā pana pāsāṇapāṇikāgatikāva. Ninnunnataṭṭhānābhāvena bherītalasadisaṃ katvā. Tato dūrataretiādi yathāvuttato padesato, pīṭhato ca aññasmiṃ ādīnavadassanaṃ. Kasiṇadosāti hatthapāṇipadādayo idha kasiṇadosā.
按前面所说的方式,就是依照“在二肘半距离的地方,在一拃四指高的座位上”所说的做法。观察诸欲的过患,就是依照“诸欲好比骸骨,因为没有滋味;好比草炬,因为烧灼;好比炭坑,因为极度炽热;好比梦境,因为短暂显现;好比借来的东西,因为只是暂时拥有;好比树上的果子,因为会摧折一切肢节;好比屠宰场,因为要砍斫;好比矛刺,因为要穿刺;好比蛇头,因为有怖畏”等等说法,以及“诸欲乐味少、苦多、忧恼多”等等说法,还有“这欲乐实在多灾患、有怖畏、有恐惧、杂染不清净、像吃粪一样、卑劣、粗俗、是凡夫所行、不是圣者所行、不带来真实利益”等等说法,从各种角度观察事欲和烦恼欲中的过患和缺失。于诸欲的出离,就是指从诸欲出离的状态,或者从诸欲中脱离出来。它作为无上道的基础,是超越一切苦的方法。出离就是指禅那。以已经生起的欲求,也就是已经生起的意愿。通过这样忆念佛、法、僧的功德:“世尊确实是正自觉者,因为说法没有颠倒;法是善说的,因为决定导向出离;僧是善行的,因为依照教导修行”,从而生起以三宝为对象的喜悦和欢喜。依靠这个修习出离,所以叫出离道,意思是含摄近行定的禅那、内观、圣道以及涅槃的证得之因。不过前面已经说过初禅就是出离,所以其余一切出离的法也都包括在内。正如所说的——
Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘aḍḍhateyyahatthantare padese, vidatthicaturaṅgulapādake pīṭhe’’ti ca vuttavidhināva. Kāmesu ādīnavanti ‘‘kāmā nāmete aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā nirassādaṭṭhena, tiṇukkūpamā anudahanaṭṭhena, aṅgārakāsūpamā mahābhitāpaṭṭhena, supinakūpamā ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena, yācitakūpamā tāvakālikaṭṭhena, rukkhaphalūpamā sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena, asisūnūpamā adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena, sattisūlūpamā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena, sappasirūpamā sapaṭibhayaṭṭhenā’’tiādinā (pāci. aṭṭha. 417; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.234) ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā’’tiādinā (pāci. 417; ma. ni. 1.234; 2.42) ‘‘kāmasukhañca nāmetaṃ bahuparissayaṃ, sāsaṅkaṃ, sabhayaṃ, saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, mīḷhaparibhogasadisaṃ, hīnaṃ, gammaṃ, pothujjanikaṃ, anariyaṃ, anatthasaṃhita’’ntiādinā ca anekākāravokāraṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmesu ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ paccavekkhitvā. Kāmanissaraṇeti kāmānaṃ nissaraṇabhūte, tehi vā nissaṭe. Aggamaggassa pādakabhāvena sabbadukkhasamatikkamassa upāyabhūte. Nekkhammeti jhāne. Jātābhilāsena sañjātacchandena. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho vata bhagavā aviparītadhammadesanattā, svākkhāto dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā, suppaṭipanno saṅgho yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanato’’ti evaṃ buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānussaraṇena ratanattayavisayaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ janayitvā. Nekkhammaṃ paṭipajjati etāyāti nekkhammapaṭipadā, saupacārassa jhānassa, vipassanāya, maggassa, nibbānassa ca adhigamakāraṇanti attho. Pubbe pana paṭhamajjhānameva nekkhammanti vuttattā vuttāvasesā sabbepi nekkhammadhammā. Yathāha –
出家、初禅、涅槃和观
一切善法,都被称为“出离”。
‘‘Pabbajjā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, nibbānaṃ ca vipassanā; Sabbepi kusalā dhammā, ‘nekkhamma’nti pavuccare’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 109);
由心远离等远离所生的乐味,就是“独处之乐味”。应当知道,通过这五句,已经说明了“见功德者”等语句的含义。以平衡的方式:就是避开过度睁眼和过度迟钝注视,以不过度睁眼、不过度迟钝注视的平衡方式来观看。取相者:对于地遍,以心执取眼睛所取之相。应修习:应当把这样生起的取相不断增长、反复练习、多多修习。
Pavivekasukharasassāti cittavivekādivivekajassa sukharasassa. Evametehi pañcahi padehi ‘‘ānisaṃsadassāvī’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samena ākārenāti atiummīlanaatimandālocanāni vajjetvā nātiummīlananātimandālocanasaṅkhātena samena ālocanākārena. Nimittaṃ gaṇhantenāti pathavīkasiṇe cakkhunā gahitanimittaṃ manasā gaṇhantena. Bhāvetabbanti tathāpavattaṃ nimittaggahaṇaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ āsevitabbaṃ bahulīkātabbaṃ.
眼睛会疲劳,就像盯着极其微细、极其明亮的色法看一样。因为色法自身的本性不显现,它就变得过于突出。这时它可能以色或相的样子呈现出来。因此说“他的相不生起”。就像大象微阖着眼睛看的人所见的色法那样,它变得不明显;心也变得消沉,因为在观看时作用迟钝,陷入了懈怠。因此说“这样相也不生起”。就像在镜面上看自己面容的人:他不会把眼睛睁得太大,也不会睁得太小,不观察镜面的颜色,也不去注意镜面的特征,而是以平稳的方式观看,只看到自己的面容;同样,这位修行者以平稳的方式观看地遍时,也只是专注于取相。因此说“以平稳的方式”等等。不应观察颜色,是指地遍中那如曙光般的颜色,不应去思虑它。不过,用眼识去执取是无法阻止的,所以这里没有说“不应看”,而是用了“观察”这个词。不应作意特征,是指地界中那坚硬的特征,不应去作意它。
Cakkhu kilamati atisukhumaṃ, atibhāsurañca rūpagataṃ upanijjhāyato viya. Ativibhūtaṃ hoti attano sabhāvāvibhāvato. Tathā ca vaṇṇato vā lakkhaṇato vā upatiṭṭheyya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tenassa nimittaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti. Avibhūtaṃ hoti gajanimmīlanena pekkhantassa rūpagataṃ viya. Cittañca līnaṃ hoti dassane mandabyāpāratāya kosajjapātato. Tenāha ‘‘evampi nimittaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti. Ādāsatale mukhanimittadassinā viyāti yathā ādāsatale mukhanimittadassī puriso na tattha atigāḷhaṃ ummīlati, nāpi atimandaṃ, na ādāsatalassa vaṇṇaṃ paccavekkhati, nāpi lakkhaṇaṃ manasi karoti. Atha kho samena ākārena olokento attano mukhanimittameva passati, evameva ayampi pathavīkasiṇaṃ samena ākārena olokento nimittaggahaṇappasutoyeva hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samena ākārenā’’tiādi. Na vaṇṇo paccavekkhitabboti yo tattha pathavīkasiṇe aruṇavaṇṇo, so na cintetabbo. Cakkhuviññāṇena pana gahaṇaṃ na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘na oloketabbo’’ti avatvā paccavekkhaṇaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Na lakkhaṇaṃ manasi kātabbanti yaṃ tattha pathavīdhātuyā thaddhalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ na manasi kātabbaṃ.
看见之后应当执取,所以虽然说了“不舍弃色”,但在这里不应依色作意;然而应当让那色属于依止的。为了说明这一点,他说“以依止色而作”。意思是:那色依于依止处而有相同的形态,让它与那大地有相同的性质,应当连同色一起作意“大地”。由于增盛而成为施设法,是指地界增盛、比其他界更显著时,对于具有种种聚合的大地,世间惯用语称为“大地”。应当把心安置在那施设法上,作意“大地、大地”。如果应以世间惯用语把心安立在纯粹施设上,那么即使以其他名称作意大地也可以。为了说明“可以,有什么过失”,他说“大地、大地”等。其中,“随其所欲”是指想说什么名称,就应说那个名称。而且,那应当是适合他想的名称,也就是那位瑜伽行者先前在那里所取的想,由于惯熟或熟练而现起的名称,就应说那个名称。说“应说”,是就初次作意时有些人会说出言语而说的,或者是指应依阿阇梨的教导而说。何必多说,为了说明在这里以明显为准则,他说“而且”等。“有时睁眼、有时闭眼”,是指有时睁眼,以取相的方式观看地圆,然后再次闭眼而作意。应以何种方式观看而执取,就应以那种方式再次作意。
Disvā gahetabbattā ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ amuñcitvā’’ti vatvāpi vaṇṇavasenettha ābhogo na kātabbo, so pana vaṇṇo nissayagatiko kātabboti dassento āha ‘‘nissayasavaṇṇaṃ katvā’’ti. Nissayena samānākārasannissito so vaṇṇo tāya pathaviyā samānagatikaṃ katvā, vaṇṇena saheva ‘‘pathavī’’ti manasi kātabbanti attho. Ussadavasena paṇṇattidhammeti pathavīdhātuyā ussannabhāvena sattito adhikabhāvena sasambhārapathaviyaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’ti yo lokavohāro, tasmiṃ paṇṇattidhamme cittaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ‘‘pathavī, pathavī’’ti manasi kātabbaṃ. Yadi lokavohārena paṇṇattimatte cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ, nāmantaravasenapi pathavī manasi kātabbā bhaveyyāti, hotu, ko dosoti dassento ‘‘mahī medinī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yamicchatīti yaṃ nāmaṃ vattuṃ icchati, taṃ vattabbaṃ. Tañca kho yadassa saññānukūlaṃhoti yaṃ nāmaṃ assa yogino pubbe tattha gahitasaññāvasena anukūlaṃ pacuratāya, paguṇatāya vā āgacchati, taṃ vattabbaṃ. Vattabbanti ca paṭhamasamannāhāre kassaci vacībhedopi hotīti katvā vuttaṃ, ācariyena vā vattabbataṃ sandhāya. Kiṃ vā bahunā, pākaṭabhāvoyevettha pamāṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kālena ummīletvā kālena nimmīletvāti kiñci kālaṃ cakkhuṃ ummīletvā nimittaggahaṇavasena pathavīmaṇḍalaṃ oloketvā puna kiñci kālaṃ cakkhuṃ nimmīletvā āvajjitabbaṃ. Yenākārena oloketvā gahitaṃ, tenākārena puna taṃ samannāharitabbaṃ.
57“进入范围”是指成为意门速行的所缘境。对于那取相,不应该坐在那个地方。为什么?因为如果取相已经生起,还看着地圆来修习,似相就不会生起。而且因为距离太近,也没办法看清。因此说“进入自己的住处”等等。为了安静无声,取用单层拖鞋;为了排除危险,取用木杖。如果相消失了,那么他应该用这个来修习,这是前后文的关联。在下面将要说的不适合的情况中,是由某种不适合的原因造成的。执取相,就是按照生起的样子执取取相。应作意,意思是应该转向相;或者,应该正确地、反复地把业处带到心中,这是它的意思。被寻所击、被伺所击:这里“寻”和“伺”是这种名称的由来,也就是与修习心相应的正思惟,它的作用是击打和反复击打,持续不断地击打、反复击打业处,应该使寻和作意变得有力并反复进行,这是意思。对于这样把业处做成被寻所击、被伺所击的人,对于这样精勤的人,就像修习能带来前后差别那样。次第,是指依照修习的次第。当信等诸根变得非常清净、锐利地运作时,由于不信等已经远离,得到七力的支持,寻等这些属于欲界的禅支就大量地显现出来。正因为如此,与它们直接对立的欲贪等,连同与它们同处的恶法,就都远离了。随着似相的生起,依于它而生起近行定。因此说“诸盖被镇伏”等等。其中,“安坐”是指正确地安坐,也就是寂止的意思。
57.Āpāthamāgacchatīti manodvārikajavanānaṃ gocarabhāvaṃ upagacchati. Tassa uggahanimittassa. Na tasmiṃ ṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yadi uggahanimitte jātepi pathavīmaṇḍalaṃ oloketvā bhāveti, paṭibhāganimittuppatti na siyā. Samīpaṭṭhena ca na oloketuṃ na sakkā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā’’tiādi. Nissaddabhāvāya ekapaṭalikūpāhanāgahaṇaṃ, parissayavinodanatthaṃ kattaradaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ. Sace nassati, athānena bhāvetabbanti sambandho. Vakkhamānesu asappāyesu kenacideva asappāyena kāraṇabhūtena. Nimittaṃ ādāyāti yathājātaṃ uggahanimittaṃ gahetvā. Samannāharitabbanti āvajjitabbaṃ nimittanti adhippāyo, sammā vā anu anu āharitabbaṃ kammaṭṭhānanti attho. Takkāhataṃ vitakkāhatanti takkanato, savisesaṃ takkanato ca ‘‘takko, vitakko’’ti ca evaṃ laddhanāmena bhāvanācittasampayuttena sammāsaṅkappena āhananapariyāhananakiccena aparāparaṃ vattamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ āhataṃ, pariyāhatañca kātabbaṃ, balappattavitakko manasikāro bahulaṃ pavattetabboti attho. Evaṃ karontassāti evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ karontassa. Yathā bhāvanā pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahati, evaṃ anuyuñjantassa. Anukkamenāti bhāvanānukkamena. Yadā saddhādīni indriyāni suvisadāni tikkhāni pavattanti, tadā assaddhiyādīnaṃ dūrībhāvena sātisayathāmappattehi sattahi balehi laddhūpatthambhāni vitakkādīni kāmāvacarāneva jhānaṅgāni bahūni hutvā pātubhavanti. Tato eva tesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā kāmacchandādayo saddhiṃ tadekaṭṭhehi pāpadhammehi vidūrī bhavanti, paṭibhāganimittuppattiyā saddhiṃ taṃ ārabbha upacārajjhānaṃ uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhantī’’tiādi. Tattha sannisīdantīti sammadeva sīdanti, upasamantīti attho.
“对此”指的是似相。手指印、脚掌印之类,是遍作相的过失。通过镜面等比喻,说明似相比取相更清净、更微细。而那似相既没有颜色,也没有形状,因为它不是究竟法的自性。“如此”是指有颜色和形状的。“被三相所侵袭”是指被生起等三相所渗透,或者被无常等三相所标记。如果它不是这样具有颜色等,那怎么能成为禅那的所缘呢?所以说“唯是……”等。“由想所生”是指由修习之想所生,仅仅是修习之想所生。因为非实有自性者,不可能从任何地方生起。因此说“仅是显现之相而已”。
Imassāti paṭibhāganimittassa. Aṅgulipadapāṇipadādiko kasiṇadoso. Ādāsamaṇḍalūpamādīhi uggahanimittato paṭibhāganimittassa suparisuddhataṃ, saṇhasukhumatañca dasseti. Tañca kho paṭibhāganimittaṃ neva vaṇṇavantaṃ na saṇṭhānavantaṃ aparamatthasabhāvattā. Īdisanti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānavantaṃ. Tilakkhaṇabbhāhatanti uppādādilakkhaṇattayānupaviṭṭhaṃ, aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṅkitaṃ vā. Yadi na panetaṃ tādisaṃ vaṇṇādivantaṃ, kathaṃ jhānassa ārammaṇabhāvoti āha ‘‘kevalañhī’’tiādi. Saññajanti bhāvanāsaññājanitaṃ, bhāvanāsaññāya sañjātamattaṃ. Na hi asabhāvassa kutoci samuṭṭhānaṃ atthi. Tenāha ‘‘upaṭṭhānākāramatta’’nti.
58只是被镇伏、只是已平息下来,并不是要为此付出努力,这是本意。当说到“由近行定”时,从含义上就可以推知还有另一种定存在,为了也说明这一点,便开始了“定确实有两种”等论述。“以两种方式”是指:禅那诸法远离敌对法,以及达到稳固状态,以这两种原因。现在为了通过阶段来显示这些原因,所以说“或在近行地”等。“近行地”是指在近行的阶段。虽然那时禅支还没有生起为更明显、达到广大的状态,但通过镇伏那些敌对法,心就得以集中。因此说“由舍断诸盖,心得集中”。“得地”是指在证得禅那的阶段。因为那时,通过达到安止的禅那诸法的生起,心得以集中。因此说“由诸支显现”。心得以集中,这是前后关联。
58.Vikkhambhitāneva sannisinnāva, na pana tadatthaṃ ussāho kātabboti adhippāyo. ‘‘Upacārasamādhinā’’ti vutte itaropi samādhi atthīti atthato āpannanti tampi dassetuṃ ‘‘duvidho hi samādhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Dvīhākārehīti jhānadhammānaṃ paṭipakkhadūrībhāvo, thirabhāvappatti cāti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Idāni tāni kāraṇāni avatthāmukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upacārabhūmiyanti upacārāvatthāyaṃ. Yadipi tadā jhānaṅgāni paṭutarāni mahaggatabhāvappattāni na uppajjanti, tesaṃ pana paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanena cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘nīvaraṇappahānena cittaṃ samāhitaṃ hotī’’ti. Paṭilābhabhūmiyanti jhānassa adhigamāvatthāyaṃ. Tadā hi appanāpattānaṃ jhānadhammānaṃ uppattiyā cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgapātubhāvenā’’ti. Cittaṃ samāhitaṃ hotīti sambandho.
“未生起力量”是指还没有生起力量,还没有达到修习之力,这就是它的意思。“心”是指禅那心。它能持续整夜、整日,这是就入定的时间来说的。在近行地,使相增长是合适的,所以才说“使相增长后”。“所得退失”是指已得到的近行禅那退失。当相没有消失时,以它为所缘的禅那也不会退失;但是,当相因为缺乏守护而消失时,已得到的禅那也会随之消失,因为它是依于相而存在的。因此说“在守护上……”等。
Na thāmajātānīti na jātathāmāni, na bhāvanābalaṃ pattānīti attho. Cittanti jhānacittaṃ. Kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divasaṃ tiṭṭhatīti samāpattivelaṃ sandhāyāha. Upacārabhūmiyaṃ nimittavaḍḍhanaṃ yuttanti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nimittaṃ vaḍḍhetvā’’ti. Laddhaparihānīti laddhaupacārajjhānaparihāni. Nimitte avinassante tadārammaṇajhānampi aparihīnameva hoti, nimitte pana ārakkhābhāvena vinaṭṭhe laddhaṃ laddhaṃ jhānampi vinassati tadāyattavuttito. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhamhī’’tiādi.
七种适宜条件的注释
Sattasappāyavaṇṇanā
59说了“而且是稳固的”之后,为了说明怎样才是稳固,便说“念现前,心得定”。因为对于把所获得的相在那里让念好好现前、从而获得一境性的人来说,这相就叫做稳固,而且被善加守护。这里,通过“念”这个词也包含了正知,通过“定”这个词也包含了精进,因为它们是相续不离的。“在那里”是指在那些住处。“三日三日”是指在一个个住处,按照不在已住过的地方住的规则,各住三天。
59. ‘‘Thāvarañca hotī’’ti vatvā yathā thāvaraṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sati upaṭṭhāti, cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāladdhañhi nimittaṃ tattha satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ekaggataṃ vindantassa thiraṃ nāma hoti, surakkhitañca. Sati-ggahaṇena cettha sampajaññaṃ, samādhiggahaṇena vīriyañca saṅgahitaṃ hoti nānantariyabhāvato. Tatthāti tesu āvāsesu. Tīṇi tīṇīti ekekasmiṃ āvāse avutthaavutthaṭṭhāne vasananiyāmena tayo tayo divase vasitvā.
说“或者朝北,或者朝南”,是为了避免在往返时面朝太阳。它的长度是一千弓,也就是一又二分之一拘萨。
Uttarena vā dakkhiṇena vāti vuttaṃ gamanāgamane sūriyābhimukhabhāvanivāraṇatthanti. Sahassadhanuppamāṇaṃ diyaḍḍhakosaṃ.
三十二种畜生论是就王论等(长部1.17;中部2.223;相应部5.1080;增支部10.69;波逸提508)而说的。因为那些森林、山岳、河流、岛屿等谈论虽然在巴利经典中没有以具体形式出现,却由iti一词所摄,由于它们对天界与解脱而言是畜生性的,所以称为“三十二种畜生论”。依于十种论事是指少欲、知足、远离、不交际、精进勤策、戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,这些是少欲论等的论事,依此而起的言论才是适宜的。
Dvattiṃsa tiracchānakathāti rājakathādike (dī. ni. 1.17; ma. ni. 2.223; saṃ. ni. 5.1080; a. ni. 10.69; pāci. 508) sandhāyāha. Tā hi pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatāpi araññapabbatanadīdīpakathā iti-saddena saṅgahetvā saggamokkhānaṃ tiracchānabhāvato ‘‘dvattiṃsa tiracchānakathā’’ti vuttā. Dasakathāvatthunissitanti ‘‘appicchatā, santuṭṭhi, paviveko, asaṃsaggo, vīriyārambho, sīla, samādhi, paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassana’’nti imāni appicchakathādīnaṃ vatthūni, tannissitaṃ bhassaṃ sappāyaṃ.
“不是畜生论者”是指不谈畜生论;他的意思是,只讲与正法相应、和业处有关的言论。“具足戒等功德”是指具足戒、定等功德。因为,一个修定业处的人,或者已经达到定业处彼岸的人,对这位修行者来说是适合的。所以说“依止于……”等。“多致力于身体强健”是指专心于身体的滋养和养护。关于这一点,曾这样说:“随其所欲,吃到饱胀,然后沉溺于躺卧之乐、倚靠之乐、睡眠之乐而住。”
Atiracchānakathikoti natiracchānakathiko, tiracchānakathā vidhuraṃ dhammikaṃ kammaṭṭhānapaṭisaṃyuttameva kathaṃ kathetīti adhippāyo. Sīlādiguṇasampannoti sīlasamādhiādiguṇasampanno. Yo hi samādhikammaṭṭhāniko, samādhikammaṭṭhānassa vā pāraṃ patto, so imassa yogino sappāyo. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ nissāyā’’tiādi. Kāyadaḷhībahuloti kāyassa santappanaposanappasuto. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186; a. ni. 5.206).
食物大多数情况下是凭着甜味或酸味而被众生食用的,正如在酸奶等东西上也能看到这种情况。而苦味等味道则纯粹是人为加工出来的。所以经文说:“对某些人来说甜味合适,对某些人来说酸味合适。”
Bhojanaṃ yebhuyyena madhurambilarasavasena sattānaṃ upayogaṃ gacchati dadhiādīsu tathā dassanato. Kaṭukādirasā pana kevalaṃ abhisaṅkhārakā evāti āha ‘‘kassaci madhuraṃ, kassaci ambilaṃ sappāyaṃ hotī’’ti.
无论是以站姿、行走等威仪为所依而安住时,还是在任何一种威仪中持续活动时。所谓“多修习相”,是指对相多多修习——也就是以似相为所缘境,反复不断地修习作意;或者依行境的修习而多修习相。因为对一位这样修习的人来说,既然有修习上的多修,那么行境上的多修也是应当希求的。
Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe ādhārabhūte, vattamāne vā, yasmiṃ vā iriyāpathe pavattamānassa. Nimittāsevanabahulassāti nimitte āsevanābahulassa paṭibhāganimitte visayabhūte bhāvanāmanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ āsevantassa, nimittassa vā gocarāsevanavasena āsevanābahulassa. Yena hi bhāventassa bhāvanāsevanā, tena gocarāsevanāpi icchitabbāti.
十种安止善巧的注释
Dasavidhaappanākosallavaṇṇanā
60没有安止。以某种方式对安止善巧,那十种方式就是安止善巧,或者是由此产生的智。令所依清净:因为让诸所依变得清净,所以应当希求安止善巧,这就是它们的关联。其余几句也应当这样理解。
60.Na hoti appanā. Yena vidhinā appanāyaṃ kusalo hoti, so dasavidho vidhi appanākosallaṃ, tannibbattaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ. Vatthuvisadakiriyatoti vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇato appanākosallaṃ icchitabbanti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi.
6161. 因为身体是心和心所生起活动的处所,与身体相连的衣服等物,在这里就被称为“所依”。让这些东西成为能带给心安乐的状态,就是使它们变得清净。因此说“内与外的……”等等。“或身体”里的“或”字并不是用来表示选择,而是说身体被汗垢沾染,或者被其他不净之事所困扰。“或坐卧处”里的“或”字,应当理解为也把钵等物品包括在内。难道这个方法不是已经包含在断除小障碍里了吗?为什么还要再说呢?确实已经包含了,但那是在刚开始修习的时候说的。而在这里,是针对已经着手修业处、安住在近行定中、等待安止生起的人,在过了一段时间之后,为了让他们在安止上达到善巧,才说应当这样去做。这是当所依不清净,或者它成为所缘的时候。为什么说精勤修习的人会以它们为所缘呢?这是根据其间不断生起的心念来说的,因为这些心念会导致心一境性变得不清净。在心与心所作为所依等缘的时候。“智也一样”中的“也”字是表示合集。由此说明:“不只是所依本身,当它不清净时,智也会变得不清净。”与智相应诸法的不清净虽然没有明说,但已经自然成立,之所以单独提出智,是因为它对安止极为重要。正如禅那被分为“迟钝通智”和“速疾通智”,就是通过智的角度来描述的。所依的所依也可以称为所依,所以说“灯盏、灯芯、灯油”是所依。为了说明当智不清晰时,就像观禅的修习一样,止禅的修习也会变得非常软弱无力,因此说“以不清净的智”等话。其中,“业处”指的是止业处。“增长”应当从支分显现的角度来理解,“滋长”应当从功德增益的角度来理解,“广大”应当从完全达到自在的角度来理解。至于“清净”那一面,则属于白分,它的含义应当按前面所说的反过来理解。
61. Cittacetasikānaṃ hi pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato sarīraṃ, tappaṭibaddhāni cīvarādīni ca idha ‘‘vatthūnī’’ti adhippetāni. Tāni yathā cittassa sukhāvahāni honti, tathā karaṇaṃ tesaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhattikabāhirāna’’ntiādi. Sarīraṃ vāti vā-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, sarīraṃ sedamalaggahitaṃ vā aññena vā avassutakiccena vibādhitanti adhippāyo. Senāsanaṃ vāti vā-saddena pattādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cāyaṃ nayo khuddakapalibodhupacchedena saṅgahito, puna kasmā vuttoti? Saccaṃ saṅgahito, so ca kho bhāvanāya ārambhakāle. Idha pana āraddhakammaṭṭhānassa upacārajjhāne ṭhatvā appanāparivāsaṃ vasantassa kālantare jāte tathāpaṭipatti appanākosallāya vuttā. Avisade sati, visayabhūte vā. Kathaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa tāni visayo? Antarantarā pavattanakacittuppādavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Te hi cittuppādā cittekaggatāya aparisuddhabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Cittacetasikesu nissayādipaccayabhūtesu. Ñāṇampīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍane. Tena ‘‘na kevalaṃ taṃ vatthuyeva, atha kho tasmiṃ aparisuddhe ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hotī’’ti dassitaṃ. Taṃsampayuttānaṃ pana aparisuddhatā avuttasiddhā, ñāṇassa ca visuṃ gahaṇaṃ appanāya bahukārattā. Tathā hi jhānaṃ ‘‘dandhābhiññaṃ, khippābhiñña’’nti ñāṇamukhena niddiṭṭhaṃ. Nissayanissayopi nissayotveva vuccatīti āha ‘‘dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāyā’’ti. Ñāṇe avisade vipassanābhāvanā viya samādhibhāvanāpi paridubbalā hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘aparisuddhena ñāṇenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammaṭṭhānanti samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ āha. Vuḍḍhiṃ aṅgapātubhāvena, virūḷhiṃ guṇabhāvena, vepullaṃ sabbaso vasibhāvappattiyā veditabbaṃ. Visade panāti sukkapakkho, tassa vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
62令其平等,是指在作用上既不欠缺也不过分。当对可信之事随缘而胜解的作用特别明显,而慧不清晰,精进等又松弛无力时,信根就变得强有力。因此说“其他诸根羸弱”。“由此”:即因为信根强而有力,其他诸根又羸弱。不让相应诸法落入懈怠一边,给予它们支持和力量,这就是策励;策励本身就是它的作用,应理解为它无法执行策励的作用。“近住”:是靠近所缘而安住,或者是不舍弃;是散乱的对治法。或者说,令相应诸法不散乱,那就是不散乱。就像用眼睛看色法一样,以何种方式如实照见所缘自性,当慧被强力的信根压制时,就无法执行那“见”的作用。因为在俱生诸法中,要让它们发挥根的作用,只能依靠同时生起的诸法一味运作来达成,而不是别的样子。因此,“故”字是把前面说的道理当作原因来回顾。“彼”:指信根。“以观察法之自性”:是指对于因胜解可信之事的殊胜功德等而强力生起的信根,通过从该可信之事的缘、缘所生等分类如实审察。这样,当以如是法性之理把握其自性时,胜解就不会全面生起,因为以“这是这些法的自性”的方式遍知的慧的作用变得殊胜。在主导法中,正如信强时慧弱,慧强时信也弱。因此说“应以观察法之自性而使之减弱”。
62.Samabhāvakaraṇanti kiccato anūnādhikabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yathāpaccayaṃ saddheyyavatthusmiṃ adhimokkhakiccassa paṭutarabhāvena, paññāya avisadatāya, vīriyādīnaṃ ca sithilatādinā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘itarāni mandānī’’ti. Tatoti tasmā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvato, itaresañca mandattā. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho, paggahova kiccaṃ, paggahakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti sambandhitabbaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ, vikkhepapaṭipakkho. Yena vā sampayuttā avikkhittā honti, so avikkhepo. Rūpagataṃ viya cakkhunā yena yāthāvato visayasabhāvaṃ passati, taṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti balavatā saddhindriyena abhibhūtattā. Sahajātadhammesu hi indaṭṭhaṃ kārentānaṃ sahapavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekarasatāvaseneva atthasiddhi, na aññathā. Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasati . Tanti saddhindriyaṃ. Dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇenāti yassa saddheyyavatthuno uḷāratādiguṇe adhimuccanassa sātisayappavattiyā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tassa paccayapaccayuppannādivibhāgato yāthāvato vīmaṃsanena. Evañhi evaṃdhammatānayena sabhāvarasato pariggayhamāne savipphāro adhimokkho na hoti, ‘‘ayaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvo’’ti parijānanavasena paññābyāpārassa sātisayattā. Dhuriyadhammesu hi yathā saddhāya balavabhāve paññāya mandabhāvo hoti, evaṃ paññāya balavabhāve saddhāya mandabhāvo hotīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena hāpetabba’’nti.
同样,“以不作意”的意思是:不以那种能让修行者精勤修习时信根变得强而有力的方式去修习,这就叫作不以那种方式修习。在这里,信根变得强而有力有两种情况:一是因为自身殊胜的缘,使它的作用超胜;二是因为精进等其他根的作用微弱。其中,第一种情况已经说明了减弱的方法;而在第二种情况中,正如以那样的作意使精进等根作用微弱、信根变得强而有力,同样,应当以不作意——也就是通过能让精进等根作用变得锐利的作意——使信根与它们达到平衡而将其减弱。按照这个方法,也应知道其余诸根的减弱方式。
Tathā amanasikārenāti yenākārena bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, tenākārena bhāvanāya ananuyuñjanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha duvidhena saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo, attano vā paccayavisesato kiccuttariyena, vīriyādīnaṃ vā mandakiccatāya. Tattha paṭhamavikappe hāpanavidhi dassito, dutiyavikappe pana yathā manasi karoto vīriyādīnaṃ mandakiccatāya saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena vīriyādīnaṃ paṭukiccabhāvāvahena manasikārena saddhindriyaṃ tehi samarasaṃ karontena hāpetabbaṃ. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi hāpanavidhi veditabbo.
婆迦梨长老的故事:这位尊者因为信解坚定,过去曾累积善行,一心只想着瞻仰世尊的色身,就这样过日子。世尊教导他说:“婆迦梨,你看着这具腐臭的身体有什么用?婆迦梨,见到法的人,就是见到我。”这样教诫之后,虽然让他修业处,他却不肯精勤用功,被世尊遣离后,就想自杀,爬上了悬崖。那时,世尊就坐在原处放出光明,示现自身,
Vakkalittheravatthūti so hi āyasmā saddhādhimuttatāya katādhikāro satthu rūpakāyadassanappasuto eva hutvā viharanto satthārā ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena? Yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ovaditvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojitopi taṃ ananuyuñjanto paṇāmito attānaṃ vinipātetuṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ abhiruhi. Atha naṃ satthā yathānisinnova obhāsaṃ visajjento attānaṃ dassetvā –
满怀喜悦的比丘,对佛陀的教法净信,
证得寂静的境界,诸行止息,这就是乐。
‘‘Pāmojjabahulo bhikkhu, pasanno buddhasāsane; Adhigacche padaṃ santaṃ, saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 381) –
说完偈颂后,世尊对他说:“来吧,婆迦梨。”他就像被甘露灌了顶一样,满心欢喜,随即开始修观。可是因为信根太强,他没能进入观禅的进程。世尊知道后,为了帮他平衡诸根,先净化了业处,再教给他。他依照世尊所教的方法精勤修观,顺着道果的次第,最终证得阿拉汉。因此说:“婆迦梨长老的故事,在这里可以作为例证。”
Gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘ehi vakkalī’’ti āha. So tena amateneva abhisitto haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapesi. Saddhāya pana balavabhāvato vipassanāvīthiṃ na otari. Taṃ ñatvā bhagavā indriyasamataṃ paṭipādento kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā adāsi. So satthārā dinnanayena vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassana’’nti.
“其他作用的差别”,指的是现起等作用的差别。“轻安等”里的“等”字,应当知道是包含了定觉支和舍觉支。“应当减弱”,意思是:就像信根的力量通过观察诸法的自性而减弱,同样,精进根的过度强盛也通过修习轻安等而减弱,因为轻安等属于定这一边。正如修习精进等能防止定根过度强盛而落入懈怠,同样,修习轻安等也能防止精进根过度强盛而落入掉举,从而决定性地使它减弱。因此说“应当通过修习轻安等来减弱”。
Itarakiccabhedanti upaṭṭhānādikiccavisesaṃ. Passaddhādīti ādi-saddena samādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Hāpetabbanti yathā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena hāyati, evaṃ vīriyindriyassa adhimattatā passaddhiādibhāvanāya hāyati, samādhipakkhiyattā tassā. Tathā hi sā samādhindriyassa adhimattataṃ kosajjapātato rakkhantī vīriyādibhāvanā viya vīriyindriyassa adhimattataṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhantī ekaṃsato hāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabba’’nti.
首那长老的故事(《大品》243)——就是身体极其娇嫩的首那长老的事迹。这位尊者从导师面前领受了业处后,住在清凉林里,心想:“我的身体太娇嫩了,光靠舒服是不可能证得快乐的;就算把身体弄累了,也还是得修沙门法。”于是他下定决心,只做站立和经行,精勤用功。即使脚底起了泡,他也只是旁观着那种感受,坚持精进。但因为用力过猛,没能证得什么殊胜的成果。导师去了那里,用琴弦的比喻来教导他,给他开示让精进保持平衡的方法,帮他把业处理顺之后,就回灵鹫山了。首那长老也按照导师教的方法,把精进调到平衡,推动观智,最后证得了阿拉汉果。因此才说“应当讲述首那长老的故事”。
Soṇattherassa vatthūti (mahāva. 243) sukumārassa soṇattherassa vatthu. So hi āyasmā satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sītavane viharanto ‘‘mama sarīraṃ sukhumālaṃ, na ca sakkā sukheneva sukhaṃ adhigantuṃ, kāyaṃ kilametvāpi samaṇadhammo kātabbo’’ti ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāya padhānamanuyuñjanto pādatalesu phoṭesu uṭṭhitesupi vedanaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā daḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karonto accāraddhavīriyatāya visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi. Satthā tattha gantvā vīṇovādena ovaditvā vīriyasamatāyojanavidhiṃ dassento kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā gijjhakūṭaṃ gato. Theropi satthārā dinnanayena vīriyasamataṃ yojento vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabba’’nti.
“其余诸根”是指念根、定根、慧根。“一一”是指每一个单独来看。这里应当理解为一般性的说明。这样,说明了五根各自过强时应当减损而达到平衡之后,现在为了说明其中哪些根特别地、以不共的方式和以共的方式应当保持平衡,所以说了“然而特别地”等话。“在此”是指在五根之中。“平衡”是指信与慧彼此之间没有谁多谁少的状态,定与精进之间也是如此。就像信与慧各自作为主导之法,在作用上互不超越,这是特别应当保持的,因为二者均等时才能成就安止;同样,定与精进分属懈怠与掉举两边,当二者均等时,由于念存在而相互支持,相应诸法就不会落入两个极端,安止才能真正成就。
Sesesupīti satisamādhipaññindriyesupi. Ekassāti ekekassa. Sāmaññaniddesovāyaṃ daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ paccekaṃ adhimattatāya pana hāpanavasena samataṃ dassetvā idāni tattha yesaṃ visesato asādhāraṇato, sādhāraṇato ca samatā icchitabbā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesato panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Etthāti etesu pañcasu indriyesu. Samatanti saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvaṃ. Tathā samādhivīriyānaṃ . Yathā hi saddhāpaññānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ dhuriyadhammabhūtānaṃ kiccato aññamaññānativattanaṃ visesato icchitabbameva, yato nesaṃ samadhuratāya appanā sampajjatīti, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ kosajjauddhaccapakkhikānaṃ samarasatāya sati aññamaññūpatthambhanato sampayuttadhammānaṃ antadvayapātābhāvena sammadeva appanā ijjhati.
信力强这句话是举例说明。它的意思是:一个人具备很强的信,但智慧不清楚,那就是盲目的净信,不是经过验证的净信。这样的人会对不该信的对象也生起信心,就像外道弟子一样。他偏向欺诈那一方。信不足而智慧又过度奔跑的人,被似是而非的理由欺骗,就臆想出“不用真正舍出布施之物,只要生起一念心,也算布施所成的功德”这类说法。这样的人,心被干枯的思择搅乱,不接受智者的教导,也无法被说服。所以说:就像由药引发的病,无法医治。正如这里信与慧互相分离会带来无益和有害,同样应当知道,定与精进互相分离也不会带来不散乱,而是会带来散乱。意思是:懈怠占了上风,因此达不到安止。掉举占了上风这一句,道理也一样。那两者,指的是信与慧这一对,以及定与精进这一对。应当令其平等,就是应当令它们均等。
‘‘Balavasaddho hī’’tiādi nidassanavasena vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yo balavatiyā saddhāya samannāgato avisadañāṇo, so muddhappasanno hoti, na aveccappasanno. Tathā hi so avatthusmiṃ pasīdati seyyathāpi titthiyasāvakā. Kerāṭikapakkhanti sāṭheyyapakkhaṃ bhajati. Saddhāhīnāya paññāya atidhāvanto ‘‘deyyavatthupariccāgena vinā cittuppādamattenapi dānamayaṃ puññaṃ hotī’’tiādīni parikappeti hetupaṭirūpakehi vañcito. Evaṃbhūto pana sukkhatakkaviluttacitto paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ nādiyati, saññattiṃ na gacchati. Tenāha ‘‘bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hotī’’ti. Yathā cettha saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaviraho na atthāvaho anatthāvaho ca, evamidhāpi samādhivīriyānaṃ aññamaññaviraho na avikkhepāvaho vikkhepāvaho cāti veditabbaṃ. Kosajjaṃ abhibhavati, tena appanaṃ na pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo. Uddhaccaṃ abhibhavatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tadubhayanti taṃ saddhāpaññādvayaṃ, samādhivīriyadvayañca. Samaṃ kātabbanti samarasaṃ kātabbaṃ.
对于修止业处的人,也就是修习止禅业处的人。如此,意思是:当情况是这样,当他们那些信等力量强盛时。生信,是指不去想“仅仅靠作意‘大地、大地’怎么能证得禅那”,而是相信“正自觉者所说的方法一定会成功”,从而生起信心、令信增长。令信解,是指像进入所缘一样,以信解的方式投入、趋入。一境性应当强而有力,因为禅那以定为增上。两者,是指定与慧。对于修止业处的人,定的强盛也是应当追求的,所以说“也以平衡”,意思是以均等的状态。安止,这里指的是此处所说的安止。因此他用带有保留的语气说“是存在的”,然而出世间的安止,只有以它们的均等状态才是应当追求的。正如所说:“修习止观双运。”
Samādhikammikassāti samathakammaṭṭhānikassa. Evanti evaṃ sante, saddhāya tesaṃ balavabhāve satīti attho. Saddahantoti ‘‘pathavī pathavī’’ti manasikaraṇamattena kathaṃ jhānuppattīti acintetvā ‘‘addhā sammāsambuddhena vuttavidhi ijjhissatī’’ti saddahanto saddhaṃ janento. Okappentoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya adhimuccanavasena okappento pakkhandanto. Ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati samādhipadhānattā jhānassa. Ubhinnanti samādhipaññānaṃ, samādhikammikassa samādhino adhimattatāpi icchitabbāti āha ‘‘samatāyapī’’ti, samabhāvenāpīti attho. Appanāti idhādhippetaappanā. Tathā hi ‘‘hotiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati , lokuttarappanā pana tesaṃ samabhāveneva icchitā. Yathāha – ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 2.1, 5).
如果特别来说,信与慧、定与精进这两对应当平衡,那念又怎样呢?所以回答说:“然而念在一切处都应强而有力。”所谓“一切处”,是指在五根中属于昏沉与掉举两方的情况。讲到掉举那一方时,说的是“信、精进、慧”。也可以从别的角度来理解。正如只说了“以属于懈怠一方的定”,而没有说“以轻安、定、舍”。那念,就像一位被委派处理国王一切事务的全权大臣。因此,由于念在一切处都应被需要,注释中说:“在一切处都被运用,所以是一切处所需;或者说,应被一切属于昏沉与掉举一方的觉支所需要,所以是一切处所需;一切处所需就是一切处所需。”“心”,指善心。因为对于这颗心来说,念是依靠、是归宿,是为了获得未获得的,为了证达未证达的。因此说:“以守护为现起”等等。
Yadi visesato saddhāpaññānaṃ, samādhivīriyānañca samatā icchitā, kathaṃ satīti āha ‘‘sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sabbatthāti līnuddhaccapakkhesu pañcasu indriyesu. Uddhaccapakkhiye gaṇhanto ‘‘saddhāvīriyapaññāna’’nti āha. Aññathāpīti ca gahetabbā siyā. Tathā hi ‘‘kosajjapakkhena samādhinā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘passaddhisamādhiupekkhāhī’’ti. Sā sati. Sabbesu rājakammesu niyutto sabbakammiko. Tena kāraṇena sabbattha icchitabbatthena. Āha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Sabbattha niyuttā sabbatthikā, sabbena vā līnuddhaccapakkhiyena bojjhaṅgaggahaṇena atthetabbā sabbatthiyā, sabbatthiyāva sabbatthikā. Cittanti kusalacittaṃ. Tassa hi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.
63心一境性之相,就是心一境性的相,也就是被称为心一境性的那个相。因为,当人注意到心处于等持的状态后,守护止的相,就是在守护遍的相。因此,说到地遍等的时候,通过等这个字,应当理解到:不只是取似相,也要取止的相。这就是守护的善巧。在这里,关于安止善巧的讨论中,所指的就是相善巧,因为作善巧与修习善巧已经先成就了,这就是意旨所在。
63.Cittekaggatānimittassāti cittekaggatāya nimittassa, cittekaggatāsaṅkhātassa ca nimittassa. Cittassa hi samāhitākāraṃ sallakkhetvā samathanimittaṃ rakkhantoyeva kasiṇanimittaṃ rakkhati. Tasmā pathavīkasiṇādikassāti ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ paṭibhāganimittasseva, atha kho samathanimittassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tanti rakkhaṇakosallaṃ. Idha appanākosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘nimittakosalla’’nti adhippetaṃ, karaṇabhāvanākosallānaṃ pageva siddhattāti adhippāyo.
64“过度松懈的精进等”:用“等”这个字,把喜悦和悚惧的反面也一并收进来了。“沉滞”:就是萎缩、掉进懈怠那一边。“心”:指修习的心。“修习择法觉支等”:这里要把“三者”这个词带进来连接。至于这三者该怎么修,论主自己接下来就会说。
64.Atisithilavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena pamodanasaṃvejanavipariyāye saṅgaṇhāti. Līnanti saṅkucitaṃ kosajjapakkhapatitaṃ. Cittanti bhāvanācittaṃ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāvetīti ettha ‘‘tayo’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yathā pana te bhāvetabbā, taṃ sayameva vakkhati.
“少”就是微少。“想要点燃”就是想要点亮。“应该给水风”就是把水和风送过去。“非时”就是不是时候,或者不恰当的时候。依着称为念等法之聚的菩提而觉悟,或者说具足它的人由此觉悟,所以它是瑜伽修行者的支分,因此叫觉支;殊胜的、善妙的觉支就是正觉支。以身心不安的止息为特相的轻安本身就是觉支,所以叫轻安觉支。定觉支等也是同样的道理。不过这里有一个差别——定的字义和特相前面已经说过了。依现起而观察,所以叫舍。但这里的舍,从意义上说,应当知道就是这里所说的觉支舍,即平等中舍。“难以令其生起”就是无法使它生起、无法使它产生。“对诸法的简择”或“在诸法中的简择”就是择法,意思是智慧。“英雄的状态”或“作用”,或者依规则应当被策励、应当被推动的,就是精进,即努力。“使身体满足,使心喜悦”就是喜。
Parittanti appakaṃ. Ujjāletukāmoti padīpetukāmo. Udakavātaṃ dadeyyāti udakamissaṃ vātaṃ upaneyya. Akāloti nakālo, ayuttakālo vā. Satiādidhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā bujjhati etāyāti katvā, taṃsamaṅgino vā bujjhatīti bodhino yogino aṅganti bojjhaṅgo , pasattho, sundaro vā bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo . Kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhiyeva sambojjhaṅgo passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, tassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa. Samādhisambojjhaṅgādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – samādhissa tāva padatthalakkhaṇāni heṭṭhā āgatāneva. Upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā. Sā panāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva idha bojjhaṅgupekkhā veditabbā. Dusamuṭṭhāpayanti samuṭṭhāpetuṃ uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Dhammānaṃ, dhammesu vā vicayo dhammavicayo, paññāti attho. Vīrassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā, vidhinā vā īretabbaṃ pavattetabbanti vīriyaṃ, ussāho. Pīṇeti kāyaṃ, cittaṃ ca santappetīti pīti.
“自己的、各各属于自己的”,意思就是属于自己本人的。“依食”就是依缘。“修习”就是令生起和增长。“善、不善”:由善巧所生起,所以是善;与那相反,就是不善。那些不善的,是有过失的;那些善的,是无过失的。不善的是卑下的,其余的是殊胜的。或者,那些由卑下的欲等所发起的善,也是卑下的,其余的是殊胜的。“黑”:就是暗黑,使心变得不光亮;“白”:就是洁白,使心变得光亮。或者,从黑的投生之因来说,是黑;从白的投生之因来说,是白。那些就是有相对者的。因为黑由于直接相反,所以与白有相对者;同样,白也与其他(黑)有相对者。或者,黑和白以及有相对者,就是黑、白、有相对者。因为乐受与苦受有相对者,苦受也与乐受有相对者。“未生”就是未产生。“令生起”就是为了生起的意义。“已生”就是已产生。“令更增长”就是为了再三存在。“令广大”就是为了广大的状态。“修习”就是为了增长。“圆满”就是为了圆满的意义。
Yaṃ yaṃ sakaṃ yathāsakaṃ, attano attanoti attho. Āhāravasenāti paccayavasena. Bhāvanāti uppādanā, vaḍḍhanā ca. Kusalākusalāti kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalā, tappaṭipakkhato akusalā. Ye akusalā, te sāvajjā. Ye kusalā, te anavajjā. Akusalā hīnā, itare paṇītā. Kusalāpi vā hīnehi chandādīhi āraddhā hīnā, itare paṇītā. Kaṇhāti kāḷakā cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇā, sukkāti odātā cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhā, sukkābhijātihetuto sukkā. Te eva sappaṭibhāgā. Kaṇhā hi ujuvipaccanīkatāya sukkehi sappaṭibhāgā. Tathā sukkāpi itarehi. Atha vā kaṇhā ca sukkā ca sappaṭibhāgā ca kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā. Sukhā hi vedanā dukkhāya vedanāya sappaṭibhāgā, dukkhā ca vedanā sukhāya sappaṭibhāgāti. Anuppannassāti anibbattassa. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannassāti nibbattassa. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunabhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
这里说的“其中”,是指“诸比丘,有……”等经文所显示的地方。依自性相和共相而通达,意思是:把无过失、乐异熟等各自触等自性相,以及无常等共相,合起来把握并通达;但也要分别地、各别地通达。已转起的作意,是指以如实了知善等各自的自性相等而生起的速行心。因为这种作意没有颠倒,所以称为“如理作意”。由于那时的转向也随它而行,所以转向也属于这一类。应当知道,这里“所恼相”等也已经被共相所包含。在善业开始策励时生起的精进,因为具有坚毅的本质,所以称为“界”,因此说“ārambhadhātu,即最初的精进”。已经获得修习的精进变得有力,能摧毁对立面,所以说“因为出离了懈怠,所以比它更强”。能摧毁极强、更强的对立法的精进,已达到越来越锐利等状态,所以说“因为次第进入更高的阶段,所以比它更强”。“ṭhāniyā”的意思是:在这里住立、转起;这是喜觉支的住立处,也就是喜觉支住立的地方。或者,应当住立的就是住立处;喜觉支在这些法中住立,所以是喜觉支住立处,也就是前后不断转起的、与喜觉支相应的诸法。不过,因为其中只有喜是喜觉支的特别原因,所以说“这只是喜的名称”。生起作意,是指这样作意:使尚未生起的喜觉支生起,已生起的喜觉支增长,如此转起的作意。
Tatthāti ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā dassitapāṭhe. Sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasenāti ekajjhaṃ katvā gahaṇe anavajjasukhavipākādikassa visuṃ visuṃ pana phusanādikassa sabhāvalakkhaṇassa, aniccādikassa sāmaññalakkhaṇassa ca paṭivijjhanavasena. Pavattamanasikāroti kusalādīnaṃ taṃtaṃsabhāvalakkhaṇādikassa yāthāvato avabujjhanavasena uppannajavanacittuppādo. So hi aviparītamanasikāratāya ‘‘yonisomanasikāro’’ti vutto. Tadābhogatāya āvajjanāpi taggatikāva. Ruppanalakkhaṇādikampi idha sāmaññalakkhaṇeneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kusalakiriyāya ādiārambhavasena pavattavīriyaṃ dhitisabhāvatāya ‘‘dhātū’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘ārambhadhātūti paṭhamavīriyaṃ vuccatī’’ti. Laddhāsevanaṃ vīriyaṃ balappattaṃ hutvā paṭipakkhaṃ vidhamatīti āha ‘‘kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavatara’’nti. Adhimattādhimattatarānaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ vidhamanasamatthaṃ paṭupaṭutarādibhāvappattaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavatara’’nti. Tiṭṭhati pavattati etthāti ṭhāniyā, pītisambojjhaṅgassa ṭhāniyā pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā. Ṭhātabbo vā ṭhāniyo, pītisambojjhaṅgo ṭhāniyo etesūti pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā, aparāparaṃ vattamānā pītisambojjhaṅgasampayuttā dhammā. Yasmā pana tesu pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgassa visesakāraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pītiyā eva etaṃ nāma’’nti. Uppādakamanasikāroti yathā manasi karoto anuppanno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati, uppanno ca vaḍḍhati, tathā pavattamanasikāro.
问法,是指先深入探究之后再发问的状态。因为,学完五部尼柯耶,亲近承事师长,对每一个义理都去追问;或者连同注释书一起深入探究后,对其中每一个疑难之处,都问“尊者,这是怎么回事?这是什么意思?”——这样的人,择法觉支就会生起。清净依处之行和诸根等持之行,已经从业略说和广说两方面讲明了。不过在那里,它们是作为导向定的因素来说的;在这里,则是作为导向慧的因素来说的。因为从导向定的那一刻起,也就导向慧,这是由于定以智为显现的相。正如经中所说:“入定者如实了知。”所谓远离劣慧之人,就是指远远避开那些劣慧、迟钝、像放在饭上的乌鸦、放在饭上的狗一样的愚痴之人。所谓亲近有慧之人,就是指时常去亲近那些以慧积累功德、善巧于谛和缘起等的圣者,或者修习毗婆舍那的大慧之人。所谓审察深智所行,就是指审察那些需要以深智行持的蕴、处、界等,或者审察那些阐明谛、缘起等道理、与空相应的经典。所谓决心于彼,就是指决心于慧,也就是倾向于慧、趣向于慧、偏向于慧。
Paripucchakatāti pariyogāhetvā pucchakabhāvo. Pañcapi hi nikāye uggahetvā ācariye pariyupāsitvā tassa tassa atthaṃ paripucchantassa, te vā saha aṭṭhakathāya pariyogāhetvā yaṃ yaṃ tattha gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’’ti pucchantassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo uppajjatīti. Vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā saṅkhepato, vitthārato ca pakāsitā eva. Tattha pana samādhisaṃvattaniyabhāvena āgatā, idha paññāsaṃvattaniyabhāvena. Yadaggena hi samādhisaṃvattanikā, tadaggena paññāsaṃvattanikā samādhissa ñāṇapaccupaṭṭhānato. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.99; 5.1071) vuttaṃ. Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma duppaññānaṃ mandabuddhīnaṃ bhattanikkhittakākamaṃsanikkhittasunakhasadisānaṃ momūhapuggalānaṃ dūrato pariccajanā. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma paññāya katādhikārānaṃ saccapaṭiccasamuppādādīsu kusalānaṃ ariyānaṃ, vipassanākammikānaṃ vā mahāpaññānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇāti gambhīrañāṇehi caritabbānaṃ khandhāyatanadhātādīnaṃ, saccapaccayākārādidīpanānaṃ vā suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttantānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatāti paññādhimuttatā, paññāya ninnapoṇapabbhāratāti attho.
“恶趣等”中的“等”字,涵盖了以过去轮回为根源的苦、以未来轮回为根源的苦,以及以现在为谋生而奔波为根源的苦。依靠精进才能证得世间与出世间的殊胜成就,这就是它的利益;而开示这种利益的方式,就是“依于精进……开示”。连同前行部分在内,导向涅槃之道就是应当行走的道路、应当遵循的行程、应当修行的修行法,因此称为“行道”。所谓“通过让施主获得大果报而恭敬团食”,意思是:通过自己正确地修行,使施主对自己所作的供养成为大果报的因,以此恭敬团食、恭敬乞食。否则,就只是以物质供养来恭敬了。所谓“远离懈怠之人”,是指远远避开那些懒惰的人——他们连修行的名字都不知道,一味追求身体强壮,吃饱了就沉溺于睡眠之乐等,尽说些畜生论之类的话。所谓“亲近已发精进之人”,是指按照“白天以经行、宴坐……”等方式发起修行、已发精进、意志坚定的人,应时常前往亲近他们。所谓“审察正勤”,是指审察四种正勤的力量。所谓“决心于彼”,是指对精进觉支生起决心,在一切威仪举止中都倾向于它、朝向它、偏向它。在这里,去除昏沉睡眠、远离懈怠之人、亲近已发精进之人、决心于彼,应当从排除对立面、提供助缘的角度来理解;而审察恶趣等怖畏等,则应当从策励的角度来理解,应知它们能令精进觉支生起。
Apāyādīti ādi-saddena jātiādiṃ atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakañca dukkhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Vīriyāyattassa lokiyalokuttaravisesassa adhigamo eva ānisaṃso, tassa dassanasīlatā vīriyāyatta…pe… dassitā. Sapubbabhāgo nibbānagāmimaggo gamanavīthi gantabbā paṭipajjitabbā paṭipadāti katvā . Dāyakānaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena piṇḍāpacāyanatāti paccayadāyakānaṃ attani kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalakārabhāvassa karaṇena piṇḍassa bhikkhāya paṭipūjanā. Itarathāti āmisapūjāya. Kusītapuggalaparivajjanatāti alasānaṃ bhāvanāya nāmamattampi ajānantānaṃ kāyadaḷhībahulānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyuñjanakānaṃ tiracchānakathikānaṃ puggalānaṃ dūrato pariccajanā. Āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatāti ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 519; a. ni. 3.16) bhāvanārambhavasena āraddhavīriyānaṃ daḷhaparakkamānaṃ puggalānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanā. Sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatāti catubbidhasammappadhānānubhāvassa paccavekkhaṇatā. Tadadhimuttatāti tasmiṃ vīriyasambojjhaṅge adhimutti sabbiriyāpathesu ninnapoṇapabbhāratā. Ettha ca thinamiddhavinodanakusītapuggalaparivajjanaāraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatadadhimuttatā paṭipakkhavidhamanapaccayūpasaṃhāravasena, apāyādibhayapaccavekkhaṇādayo samuttejanavasena vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādakā daṭṭhabbā.
对佛等没有净信与敬爱之情、心如粗糠般干涩的人,应当知道是粗涩之人;反过来,则是柔和之人。阐明佛等功德的《净信经》等经典,就是能让人产生净信的经典。所谓“以这些行相”,就是依照上面所说的、通达善等法之自性与共相的行相,以及提问等行相。所谓“这些法”,就是指善等法所摄的如理作意等,以及知法义等。
Buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena thusakharahadayā lūkhapuggalā, tabbipariyāyena siniddhapuggalā veditabbā. Buddhādīnaṃ guṇaparidīpanā sampasādanīyasuttādayo (dī. ni. 3.141 ādayo) pasādanīyasuttantā. Imehi ākārehīti yathāvuttehi kusalādīnaṃ sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivijjhanādiākārehi ceva paripucchakatādiākārehi ca. Ete dhammeti ete kusalādīsu yonisomanasikārādike ceva dhammatthaññutādike ca.
65“以过度精进等”:就是指极度提起精进等。“等”这个字,包含了悚惧、欢喜等。 “掉举”:因为定等力量微弱,所以不寂静。 “难以妥善止息”:是说没办法让它平息,没办法让它入定。
65.Accāraddhavīriyatādīhīti ativiya paggahitavīriyatādīhi. Ādi-saddena saṃvejanapamodanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Uddhatanti samādhiādīnaṃ mandatāya avūpasantaṃ. Duvūpasamayanti vūpasametuṃ samādhātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ.
看清那种状态:就是观察到并确认,修行者在之前适当的时候,已经生起过轻安、定、舍这些法,他辨认并把握了与那些心及心所相应的轻安状态、入定状态和舍的状态。在三处:就是指“诸比丘,有身轻安……”等经文所说的三处,或者它们所说明的三种法的类别。当人留意随顺定的状态并把握它时,这本身就是止,所以说“止相就是止的同义词”。散乱:因为在各种所缘上到处游转,所以有种种分支、种种去向,这就是散乱、掉举。正如所说,它以不安住为作用,以慌乱为表现。由于具有一境性,它是散乱的对立面,即不散乱,也就是定。它本身就是相,应该像前面那样来说明。因此说:“以不散乱的含义,它本身就是不散乱相的同义词。”
Taṃākāraṃ sallakkhetvāti yenākārena assa yogino passaddhi samādhi upekkhāti ime passaddhiādayo dhammā pubbe yathārahaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle uppannapubbā, taṃ cittataṃsampayuttadhammānaṃ passaddhākāraṃ, samāhitākāraṃ, ajjhupekkhitākārañca upalakkhetvā upadhāretvā. Tīsupi padesūti ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyappassaddhī’’tiādinā āgatesu tīsupi vākyesu, tehi vā pakāsitesu tīsu dhammakoṭṭhāsesu. Yathāsamāhitākāraṃ sallakkhetvā gayhamāno samatho eva samathanimittanti āha ‘‘samathanimittanti ca samathassevetamadhivacana’’nti. Nānārammaṇe paribbhamanena vividhaṃ aggaṃ etassāti byaggo, vikkhepo. Tathā hi so anavaṭṭhānaraso, bhantatāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca vutto. Ekaggatābhāvato byaggapaṭipakkhoti abyaggo, samādhi. So eva nimittanti pubbe viya vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘avikkhepaṭṭhena ca tasseva abyagganimittanti adhivacana’’nti.
知道身体的状态之后,适量受用精美食物,能通过引发身体轻快等,成为轻安的助缘;同样,适宜的气候、适宜的行住坐卧姿势被采用,以及身体的活动被启动,所以说“受用精美食物”等。由于缺乏精勤的平衡等,身心粗重的人就是粗重之人。与所说的相反,应当知道身心轻安的人就是轻安之人。
Sarīrāvatthaṃ ñatvā mattaso paribhutto paṇītāhāro kāyalahutādīnaṃ samuṭṭhāpanena passaddhiyā paccayo hoti, tathā utusappāyaṃ, iriyāpathasappāyañca sevitaṃ, payogo ca kāyiko pavattitoti āha ‘‘paṇītabhojanasevanatā’’tiādi. Payogasamatādīnaṃ abhāvena sadarathakāyacittā puggalā sāraddhapuggalā. Vuttavipariyāyena passaddhakāyā puggalā veditabbā.
“无乐味”是指缺乏修习的乐味。因为修习如果沿着禅修进程推进,前后次第生起而越来越殊胜,就会给心带来乐味和寂静之乐;由于没有这个,心就成了无乐味。“依信与悚惧”是指依信的力量和悚惧的力量。“全然喜悦”是指正确地喜悦,通过生起以悚惧为先导的净信,使修习的心感到满足。“正确运转”是指远离昏沉和掉举,又依止的进程平等而运转,并且以殊胜的方式运转,所以是正确运转的修习心。“中舍”是指在策励、抑制、喜悦这三件事上不插手。“省察禅那与解脱”是指对初禅等诸禅那,以它们从敌对法中善得解脱等特征——这些禅那本身就是解脱——然后对它们如此修习、如此入定、如此决意、如此出定、如此杂染、如此清净,一一反复省察。
Nirassādassāti bhāvanassādarahitassa. Bhāvanā hi vīthipaṭipannā pubbenāparaṃ visesavatī pavattamānā cittassa assādaṃ upasamasukhaṃ āvahati, tadabhāvato nirassādaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Saddhāsaṃvegavasenāti saddhāvasena, saṃvegavasena ca. Sampahaṃsanatāti sammadeva pahaṃsanatā saṃvejanapubbakapasāduppādanena bhāvanā cittassa tosanā. Sammāpavattassāti līnuddhaccavirahena, samathavīthipaṭipattiyā ca samaṃ, savisesañca pavattiyā sammadeva pavattassa bhāvanācittassa. Ajjhupekkhanatāti paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatā. Jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatāti paṭhamādīni jhānāni paccanīkadhammehi suṭṭhu vimuttatādinā teyeva vimokkhā tesaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhāvanā, evaṃ samāpajjanā, evaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ saṃkileso, evaṃ vodāna’’nti pati pati avekkhaṇā.
对众生的中舍,是指对众生——无论可爱还是不可爱、在家还是出家——保持中立的态度,以旁观的方式看待。对诸行的中舍,是指对内在的眼等诸根,以及外在的钵、衣等物,保持中立的态度,以旁观的方式看待。对众生与诸行的执著,就是对众生与诸行的爱恋与贪著。以这些方式,是指以上所说的身与心的轻安行相、观察行相,以及受用适宜食物等行相。这些法,就是指轻安等这些法。
Sattamajjhattatāti sattesu piyaṭṭhāniyesupi gahaṭṭhapabbajitesu majjhattākāro ajjhupekkhanā. Saṅkhāramajjhattatāti ajjhattikesu cakkhādīsu, bāhiresu pattacīvarādīsu majjhattākāro ajjhupekkhanā. Sattasaṅkhārānaṃ mamāyanaṃ sattasaṅkhārakelāyanaṃ. Imehākārehīti imehi yathāvuttehi kāyacittānaṃ passaddhākārasallakkhaṇādiākārehi ceva sappāyāhārasevanādiākārehi ca. Ete dhammeti ete passaddhiādidhamme.
66“慧的加行软弱”是指慧的作用力微弱。就像布施和持戒以无贪、无嗔为主导,修习则以无痴为主导,尤其能引生安止。当慧不够强时,修习之心就像未经调配的食物,不能让人产生欢喜,因此心就变得没有滋味。当修习不能前后辗转带来殊胜进步、没有真正走上正确的道路时,由于得不到寂止之乐,心也变得没有滋味。针对这两种情况,所以说“慧的加行软弱”等。Nanti 指心。生、老、病、死,随其所应在善趣和恶趣中发生,应当知道,除此之外,还有以五种束缚、饥渴、互相伤害等为因的恶趣之苦。这一切是就诸有情依现在世而说的;至于过去和未来时中的轮回根本之苦,则是分别另说的。而那些依食物而活、依努力所得而活的有情,他们与他人不共的谋生之苦,被说为第八种悚惧事,应当这样理解。
66.Paññāpayogamandatāyāti paññābyāpārassa appabhāvena. Yathā hi dānasīlāni alobhādosappadhānāni , evaṃ bhāvanā amohappadhānā visesato appanāvahā. Tattha yadā paññā na balavatī hoti, tadā bhāvanācittassa anabhisaṅkhato viya āhāro purisassa abhiruciṃ na janeti, tena taṃ nirassādaṃ hoti. Yadā ca bhāvanā pubbenāparaṃ visesāvahā na hoti sammadeva avīthipaṭipattiyā, tadā upasamasukhassa alābhena cittaṃ nirassādaṃ hoti. Tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘paññāpayogamandatāyā’’tiādi. Nanti cittaṃ. Jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni yathārahaṃ sugatiyaṃ, duggatiyañca hontīti tadaññameva pañcavidhabandhanādikhuppipāsādiaññamaññavibādhanādihetukaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppannabhavanissitaṃ gahitanti atīte, anāgate ca kāle vaṭṭamūlakadukkhāni visuṃ gahitāni. Ye pana sattā āhārūpajīvino, tattha ca uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino, tesaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ jīvitadukkhaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ saṃvegavatthu vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这是指心的状态。在“不萎顿”等说法中,因为懈怠一类的法不过分强盛,所以不萎顿;因为掉举一类的法不过分强盛,所以不掉举;因为慧的加行圆满,以及证得寂止之乐,所以不无味。前后辗转都具足殊胜,因此对所缘正确而转起,并且循着止禅的路线进行。在这里,因为不萎顿,所以在策励时不需要费力;因为不掉举,所以在抑制时不需要费力;因为不无味,所以在令欢喜时不需要费力。因为不萎顿也不掉举,所以对所缘正确而转起;因为不无味,所以循着止禅的路线进行。或者应当这样理解:因为正确而转起,所以不萎顿、不掉举;因为循着止禅的路线进行,所以不无味。
Assāti cittassa. Alīnantiādīsu kosajjapakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anadhimattatāya alīnaṃ. Uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ dhammānaṃ anadhimattatāya anuddhataṃ. Paññāpayogasampattiyā, upasamasukhādhigamena ca anirassādaṃ. Pubbenāparaṃ savisesaṃ tato eva ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ, samathavīthipaṭipannañca. Tattha alīnatāya paggahe, anuddhatatāya niggahe, anirassādatāya sampahaṃsane na byāpāraṃ āpajjati. Alīnānuddhatatāya hi ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ anirassādatāya samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ. Samappavattiyā vā alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ, samathavīthipaṭipattiyā anirassādanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“出离行道”就是指修禅那的实践。“对定有胜解”就是指在生起定、证得禅那的时候,能够持续地投入和相应。不过,因为这是以尊重定为核心,心以倾向、朝向、偏向于定的状态运转,所以才说“以定为重”等等。
Nekkhammapaṭipadanti jhānapaṭipattiṃ. Samādhiadhimuttatāti samādhinibbattane jhānādhigame yuttappayuttatā. Sā pana yasmā samādhiṃ garuṃ katvā tattha ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvena pavattiyā hoti, tasmā ‘‘samādhigarū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
67在已经获得的相上,这样修习时,这种安止善巧就能让安止顺利现起,这是前后关联。“Sā”指的就是安止。“Hitvā hīti”里的“hi”是表示原因。因为没有这样的道理,所以要仔细观察、留意修习心转起的样态,也就是它以昏沉、掉举等方式转起的样态。应当让精进和定保持平等,也就是让精进和定达到均等的状态。那要怎么让它平等呢?于是说“微微摆动”等。其中,“layanti”是昏沉的状态,意思是萎缩。“Yantanti”是正在行进者,应当策励它,使它达到平等的状态,这就是意趣所在。因此说“制止过度策励,让它平等地转起”。那又怎么让它平等地转起呢?就说“在微尘中”等。“Yathā”就像在微尘等中,蜜蜂等怎样活动,注释书里已经用譬喻的方式作了很好的说明;同样,要从昏沉和掉举的状态中解脱出来,通过让精进与定相应平等,把心导向相——也就是让修习心朝向似相而成就,这就是它的意思。
67. Paṭiladdhe nimittasmiṃ evaṃ hi sampādayato appanākosallaṃ imaṃ appanā sampavattatīti sambandho. Sāti appanā. Hitvā hīti hi-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā ṭhānametaṃ na vijjati, tasmā cittappavattiākāraṃ bhāvanācittassa līnuddhatādivasena pavattiākāraṃ sallakkhayaṃ upadhārento. Samataṃ vīriyasseva vīriyassa samādhinā samarasataṃyeva yojayetha. Kathaṃ pana yojayethāti āha ‘‘īsakampī’’tiādi. Tattha layanti līnabhāvaṃ, saṅkocanti attho. Yantanti gacchantaṃ , paggaṇhetheva samabhāvāyāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘accāraddhaṃ nisedhetvā samameva pavattaye’’ti. Kathaṃ pana samameva pavattayeti āha ‘‘reṇumhī’’tiādi. Yathāti reṇuādīsu yathā madhukarādīnaṃ pavatti upamābhāvena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sammavaṇṇitā, evaṃ līnuddhatabhāvehi mocayitvā vīriyasamatāyojanena nimittābhimukhaṃ mānasaṃ paṭipādaye paṭibhāganimittābhimukhaṃ bhāvanācittaṃ sampādeyyāti attho.
对“朝向相而令成就”的注释
Nimittābhimukhapaṭipādanavaṇṇanā
68这里说的是那两首以“在微尘中”等语说出的偈颂。阐明其含义,就是辨析比喻和所比喻之义。Acheko 指不善巧。Pakkhandoti 指已经开始奔跑。在花朵绽放的那一刻,花粉本身是有滋味的;之后被风等吹散,或者变得没有滋味。因此,在折返时微尘耗尽,所以说“微尘耗尽时便到达”。Puppharāsiṃ 指依附在树枝上的花团。
68.Tatrāti tasmiṃ ‘‘reṇumhī’’tiādinā vuttagāthādvaye. Atthadīpanā upamūpameyyatthavibhāvanā. Achekoti akusalo. Pakkhandoti dhāvituṃ āraddho. Vikasanakkhaṇeyeva sarasaṃ kusumaparāgaṃ hoti, pacchā vātādīhi paripatati, virasaṃ vā hoti. Tasmā nivattane reṇu khīyatīti āha ‘‘khīṇe reṇumhi sampāpuṇātī’’ti. Puppharāsinti rukkhasākhāsu nissitaṃ pupphasañcayaṃ.
“外科医师的弟子们”是指在外科医师师父的弟子们当中。“放在水碗里”是指放在水碗中。“刀术”是指切开血管等刀术。“乃至触碰莲叶”是连接上下文。“以适中”是指不像之前那样作过重或过缓的加行,而是以适中的加行。“在那里”是指在莲叶上。“技艺纯净”是指极为清净的技艺、已成就的技艺。
Sallakattaantevāsikesūti sallakattaācariyassa antevāsikesu. Udakathālagateti udakathāliyaṃ ṭhapite. Satthakammanti sirāvedhanādisatthakammaṃ. Phusitumpi uppalapattanti sambandho. Samenāti purimakā viya garuṃ, mandañca payogaṃ akatvā samappamāṇena payogena. Tatthāti uppalapatte. Pariyodātasippoti suvisuddhasippo nipphannasippo.
《蜘蛛经》就是《蛛丝经》。掌舵的人,就是船夫。兰卡舱,就是用席子等材料做成的船舱内衬。用油灌注时不洒出来而把油管注满,意思是:用碟子等容器里的油灌注时,不洒出来,把带有细孔的油管注满。同样地,就像前面所说的采蜜人、箭匠、学徒、拉线人、舵手、注油者都迅速努力去做,同样,如果有比丘心想“我要赶快证得安止”而过度精进,以及像中间所说的采蜜人那些人一样不精进,这两种人都因为精进不均等,无法证得安止。但如果像最后所说的采蜜人那些人一样,努力恰到好处,这个人就能因为精进均等而证得安止。应当这样理解譬喻的对应关系。因此说“有一位比丘”等。懈怠的修习心,就是这里的意思。
Makkaṭakasuttanti lūtasuttaṃ. Niyāmako nāvāsārathī. Laṅkāranti kilañjādimayaṃ nāvākaṭasārakaṃ. Telena achaḍḍento nāḷiṃ pūretīti sarāvādigatena telena achaḍḍento sukhumacchiddakaṃ telanāḷiṃ pūreti. Evamevāti yathā te ādito vuttamadhukarasallakattaantevāsisuttākaḍḍhakaniyāmakatelapūrakā vegena payogaṃ karonti, evameva yo bhikkhu ‘‘sīghaṃ appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti, yo majjhe vuttamadhukarādayo viya vīriyaṃ na karoti, ime dvepi vīriyasamatābhāvena appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkonti. Yo pana avasāne vuttamadhukarādayo viya samappayogo, ayaṃ appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkoti vīriyasamatāyogatoti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘eko bhikkhū’’tiādi. Līnaṃ bhāvanācittanti adhippāyo.
初禅论的注释
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
69以这种方式说完之后,那位瑜伽行者以精进均等的方式,把已进入修行过程的心只安放在似相上,使心朝向相。所谓“他将成功”,就是将会成就、将会生起的意思。所谓“依致力于”,就是依修习。“其余的”,是指其余的三项或四项。“以平常心”,是指以平常的欲界心。强有力的……乃至心一境性,因为修习的力量而达到更敏锐的状态。所谓“因为预备行”,是因为反复造作。“如果因为邻近而称为近行,那种姓心本身就会有近行的名称”,所以他说“或者因为近行”。因为即使不太近,只要在不远的地方生起,也称为近行。“接近安止而运行,所以是近行。”所谓“此前的预备行”,是指在各种转向过程里的预备行。“在这里”,是指在那些称为预备、近行、随顺的当中。“最后的”,是指第三个或第四个。“因为克服了小种姓”,是因为克服了小种姓。所谓“gotta”,就是“保护”的意思;“paritta”是正在生起的名称,由于智确定一境而保护,所以叫小种姓。正如智没有所缘境就不能生起,名称没有所指也不能生起。因此,它保护那些,所以说保护。然而应当知道,那是与广大心、无上心不同的、作为欲贪行境的欲界法的不共相。在广大种姓中,也应按同样的方式理解其含义。“因为修习”,是因为令其生起。
69.Evanti vuttappakārena. Vīriyasamatāyojanavasena vīthipaṭipannaṃ bhāvanāmānasaṃ paṭibhāganimitteyeva ṭhapanavasena nimittābhimukhaṃ paṭipādayato assa yogino. Ijjhissatīti samijjhissati, uppajjissatīti attho. Anuyogavasenāti bhāvanāvasena. Sesānīti sesāni tīṇi, cattāri vā. Pakaticittehīti pākatikehi kāmāvacaracittehi. Balava…pe… cittekaggatāni bhāvanābalena paṭutarasabhāvappattiyā. Parikammattāti paṭisaṅkhārakattā. Yadi āsannattā upacāratā, gotrabhuno eva upacārasamaññā siyāti āha ‘‘samīpacārittā vā’’ti. Anaccāsannopi hi nātidūrapavattī samīpacārī nāma hoti. Appanaṃ upecca carantīti upacārāni. Ito pubbe parikammānanti nānāvajjanavīthiyaṃ parikammānaṃ. Etthāti etesu parikammupacārānulomasaññitesu. Sabbantimanti tatiyaṃ, catutthaṃ vā. Parittagottābhibhavanatoti parittassa gottassa abhibhavanato. Gaṃtāyatīti hi gottaṃ, ‘‘paritta’’nti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ, buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya rakkhatīti parittagottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na pavattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena. Tasmā so tāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. Taṃ pana mahaggatānuttaravidhuraṃ kāmataṇhāya gocarabhūtaṃ kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ āveṇikarūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahaggatagottepi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Bhāvanatoti uppādanato.
不加区分地说,一切法对一切人都有共同的名称,这是第一种方法,是“已取之取”,所以说“以未取之取”等等。以“不同转向的预备行本身就是预备行”为意旨,所以说“第一或近行”等等。第四是安止心,或者第五是安止心,按照前面所说的方式,如果第四是种姓心,这就是意思。或者第五——这里的“或”字表示不确定。为了说明这种不确定是由于这个原因,所以说“而且那是依速通达者和迟通达者而言”。其中,速通达者在第四心入安止,迟通达者在第五心入安止。那为什么是在第四或第五入安止,而不是在那之后呢?所以说“此后速行如同坠落”。从第五之后,第六和第七速行就像坠落一样,因为速行力已经耗尽,这是意旨。
Avisesena sabbesaṃ sabbā samaññāti paṭhamanayo gahitaggahaṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘aggahitaggahaṇenā’’tiādi. Nānāvajjanaparikammameva parikammanti adhippāyena ‘‘paṭhamaṃ vā upacāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Catutthaṃ appanācittaṃ, pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ pubbe vuttanayena sace catutthaṃ gotrabhu hotīti attho. Pañcamaṃ vāti vā-saddo aniyame. Svāyaṃ aniyamo iminā kāraṇenāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tañca kho khippābhiññadandhābhiññavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha khippābhiññassa catutthaṃ appeti, dandhābhiññassa pañcamaṃ. Kasmā pana catutthaṃ, pañcamaṃ vā appeti, na tato paranti āha ‘‘tato paraṃ javanaṃ patatī’’ti. Tato pañcamato paraṃ chaṭṭhaṃ, sattamañca javanaṃ patantaṃ viya hoti parikkhīṇajavattāti adhippāyo.
就像没有获得重复修习的第一速行,因为力量弱,不能生起种姓心;已经获得重复修习的,因为力量强,第二或第三速行就能生起种姓心。同样,由于已获得重复修习而具有力量,第六、第七速行也能进入安止——这是长老的意旨。因此他说“所以第六、第七也有安止”。“Tanti”指的是长老的话。由于没有得到经、随顺经和师说的支持,所以说“只是自己的见解”。“前前诸善法”这句经文不能作为依据,因为获得重复修习缘对于力量强弱并不是决定性的。事实上,没有获得重复修习的第一思也能是现法受,已获得重复修习的第二思乃至第六思则是次第受。第四、第五等,是以显示道理的方式总结前面所说的内容而说的。其中,如果第六、第七速行因为速行力耗尽而被称为“坠落”,那么第七速行的思怎么是生报受,又怎么是无间呢?这种差别并不是因为获得重复修习缘而力量强,而是因为作用阶段不同。作用阶段按开始、中间、结束分为三种。在结束阶段,因为有决定作用的思,所以有生报受等,并不是因为力量强,应当这样理解。也有人说,因为对结生成为无间缘的果相续,是以无间缘的方式被如此造作的。因此,第六、第七因为朝向悬崖,速行力耗尽,无法阻止。正如“就像有人”等所说的那样。
Yathā aladdhāsevanaṃ paṭhamajavanaṃ dubbalattā gotrabhuṃ na uppādeti, laddhāsevanaṃ pana balavabhāvato dutiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ vā gotrabhuṃ uppādeti, evaṃ laddhāsevanatāya balavabhāvato chaṭṭhaṃ, sattamampi appetīti therassa adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā chaṭṭhepi sattamepi appanā hotī’’ti. Tanti therassa vacanaṃ. Suttasuttānulomaācariyavādehi anupatthambhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘attanomatimatta’’nti. ‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.12) pana suttapadamakāraṇaṃ āsevanapaccayalābhassa balavabhāve anekantikattā. Tathā hi aladdhāsevanāpi paṭhamacetanā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā hoti, laddhāsevanā dutiyacetanā yāva chaṭṭhacetanā aparāpariyavedanīyā. Catutthapañcamesuyevātiādi vuttassevatthassa yuttidassanamukhena nigamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha yadi chaṭṭhasattamaṃ javanaṃ patitaṃ nāma hoti parikkhīṇajavattā, kathaṃ sattamajavanacetanā upapajjavedanīyā, ānantariyā ca hotīti? Nāyaṃ viseso āsevanapaccayalābhena balappattiyā. Kiñcarahi kiriyāvatthāvisesato. Kiriyāvatthā hi ārambhamajjhapariyosānavasena tividhā. Tattha ca pariyosānāvatthāya sanniṭṭhāpakacetanābhāvena upapajjavedanīyāditā hoti, na balavabhāvenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭisandhiyā anantarapaccayabhāvino vipākasantānassa anantarapaccayabhāvena tathā abhisaṅkhatattāti ca vadanti. Tasmā chaṭṭhasattamānaṃ papātābhimukhatāya parikkhīṇajavatā na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘yathā hi puriso’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这种安止并没有时间限定。所谓“时间限定”,就是限定时间。不过在这里的七种情形中,有些因为心刹那数无量,有些因为极其短暂,所以说没有时间限定。因为在这里得不到完整的速行路线的时限。因此说“此处道之后即刻是果”等。所谓“其余情形”,指初安止、世间神通、道刹那,以及从灭尽定出定者的果刹那这四种情形。
Sāca pana appanā. Addhānaparicchedoti kālaparicchedo. So panettha sattasu ṭhānesu katthaci aparimāṇacittakkhaṇatāya, katthaci atiittarakhaṇatāya natthīti vutto. Na hettha sampuṇṇajavanavīthi addhā labbhati. Tenevāha ‘‘ettha maggānantaraphala’’ntiādi. Sesaṭṭhānesūti paṭhamappanā, lokiyābhiññā, maggakkhaṇo, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa phalakkhaṇoti etesu catūsu ṭhānesu.
Ettāvatā的意思是:以此等修习次第,这位瑜伽行者进入初禅而住。当他这样安住时,他就已经证得了这初禅,即地遍——应如此连接。
Ettāvatāti ettakena bhāvanākkamena esa yogāvacaro paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Evaṃ viharatā ca anena tadeva paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇanti sambandho.
70这里说的“于此”,是指在讲禅那的那段文句里。“离”是指成为分开的状态。因此说“成为无而别离”,意思是依断除而退开。“离诸欲”这句中,用“离”字说明在禅那生起的那一刻诸欲只是不存在。而“纯离”这个词,则通过显示诸欲必定要被远离,表明了禅那与诸欲相违,以及远离诸欲是证得禅那的途径。为了说明这个意思,先说了“初禅”等,又为了让这个意思更加清楚,说了“如何”等。“犹如暗中有灯明”,用这个说明:就像夜晚因为没有灯明而黑暗得胜,同样,因为没有禅那,诸欲就在众生相续中得胜。
70.Tatthāti tasmiṃ jhānapāṭhe. Viviccitvāti visuṃ hutvā. Tenāha ‘‘vinā hutvā apakkamitvā’’ti, pajahanavasena apasakkitvāti attho. Vivicceva kāmehīti ettha ‘‘viviccā’’ti iminā vivecanaṃ jhānakkhaṇe kāmānaṃ abhāvamattaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viviccevā’’ti pana iminā ekaṃsato kāmānaṃ vivecetabbatādīpanena tappaṭipakkhatā jhānassa, kāmavivekassa ca jhānādhigamūpāyatā dassitā hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādiṃ vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viyā’’ti etena yathā padīpobhāsābhāvena rattiyaṃ andhakārābhibhavo, evaṃ jhānābhāvena sattasantatiyaṃ kāmābhibhavoti dasseti.
这里说的“此”,只是在前面的句子里起限定作用。不过不能把它理解成“仅仅从诸欲”。因为并没有对“唯从诸欲”这个限定作出成立。所谓“出离”,就是依此而离去,或者在这里面离去,所以叫出离。是谁离去呢?是诸欲。那些诸欲的出离,就是断除;从那个断除而离去,就是出离。可是,同样都是镇伏的情况下,为什么说只有诸欲的出离,而不是嗔恚等的出离呢?为了依道理和依教说来澄清这个问难,所以说了“欲界”等。其中,“超越欲界”是指:由于这是超越整个欲有的行道,因此说明这个禅那具有对欲的遍知性。又因为它是欲贪的对治,也就是后面将要说明的分别烦恼欲的敌对者。由此显示:就像慈对治嗔恚、悲对治害意一样,这个禅那也是欲贪的直接对治。这样,由于在自身生起和异熟生起时,它的本性就是从欲贪、从欲界回转,所以这个禅那特别地就是诸欲的出离。而这个意义已经包含在经文里了,所以说“如所说”等。虽然为了阐明这个意义,已经在前面句子里取了限定语,但在后面句子里也同样应当取这个限定语,因为这样意义才能成立。为了显示这一点,所以说了“在后面句子里也”等。“从此”是指从欲贪。这是决定。“以共通语”是指以不加分别的言词。彼分镇伏、断除、安息、出离、远离,就是彼分远离等。心远离、身远离,就是心远离等。在这里的禅那论中,只应看到这三种远离,因为断除远离等并不存在。
Etanti pubbapadeyeva avadhāraṇavacanaṃ. Na kho pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘kāmehi evā’’ti avadhāraṇassa akatattā. Nissaranti niggacchanti etena, ettha vāti nissaraṇaṃ. Ke niggacchanti? Kāmā, tesaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pahānaṃ tannissaraṇaṃ, tato. Kathaṃ pana samāne vikkhambhane kāmānamevetaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, na byāpādādīnanti codanaṃ yuttito, āgamato ca sodhetuṃ ‘‘kāmadhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāmadhātusamatikkamanatoti sakalassapi kāmabhavassa samatikkamapaṭipadābhāvato. Tena imassa jhānassa kāmapariññābhāvamāha. Kāmarāgapaṭipakkhatoti vakkhamānavibhāgassa kilesakāmassa paccatthikabhāvato. Tena yathā mettā byāpādassa, karuṇā vihiṃsāya, evamidaṃ jhānaṃ kāmarāgassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtanti dasseti. Evamattano pavattiyā, vipākappavattiyā ca kāmarāgato, kāmadhātuto ca vinivattasabhāvattā idaṃ jhānaṃ visesato kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Svāyamattho pāṭhagato evāti āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Kāmañcetamatthaṃ dīpetuṃ purimapadeyeva avadhāraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, uttarapadepi pana taṃ gahetabbameva tathā atthasambhavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘uttarapadepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Itoti kāmacchandato. Esa niyamo. Sādhāraṇavacanenāti avisesavacanena. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappaṭipassaddhinissaraṇavivekā tadaṅgavivekādayo. Cittakāyaupadhivivekā cittavivekādayo. Tayo eva idha jhānakathāyaṃ daṭṭhabbā samucchedavivekādīnaṃ asambhavato.
这段在《大义释》里解释(《大义释》1, 7)。在那里,先以总纲列出“有两种欲——事欲和烦恼欲”,然后以“其中,哪些是事欲?可爱的色……可爱的触”等语句说明了事欲。不过,这些应当理解为“欲”,因为它们被欲求。就在那里,也就是在《义释》中。在《分别》中,即在《禅那分别》(《分别》564)中:以希求的方式生起的微弱贪,因为具有欲求之义,所以叫“欲”;比它更强的,因为具有染著之义,所以叫“贪”;比那更强的浓厚贪,叫“欲贪”。以此思惟相与随相,因此叫“思惟”;这样生起的贪,比它更强的,因为具有染著之义,所以叫“贪”;仅仅以思惟的方式生起、比那更强的,叫“思惟贪”。应当知道,这些差别是就同一种贪的生起方式、或就状态的不同而说的,就像说“犊、应调御者、牛”那样。这些是烦恼欲。它们欲求,所以叫“欲”;或者通过它们而欲求,所以叫“欲”。
Niddeseti mahāniddese (mahāni. 1, 7). Tattha hi ‘‘uddānato dve kāmā – vatthukāmā kilesakāmā cā’’ti uddisitvā ‘‘tattha katame vatthukāmā? Manāpiyā rūpā…pe… manāpiyā phoṭṭhabbā’’tiādinā vatthukāmā niddiṭṭhā. Te pana kāmīyantīti kāmāti veditabbā. Tatthevāti niddese eva. Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge (vibha. 564). Patthanākārena pavatto dubbalo lobho chandanaṭṭhena chando, tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, tatopi balavataro bahalarāgo chandarāgo. Nimittānubyañjanāni saṅkappeti etenāti saṅkappo, tathāpavatto lobho, tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, saṅkappanavaseneva pavatto tatopi balavataro saṅkapparāgoti. Svāyaṃ pabhedo ekasseva lobhassa pavattiākāravasena, avatthābhedavasena ca veditabbo yathā ‘‘vaccho dammo balībaddo’’ti. Ime kilesakāmā. Kāmentīti kāmā, kāmenti etehīti vā.
“这样”是指:当两种欲都被含摄时,就是这样。从“事欲”来说,“从事欲而离”也可以理解为“从事欲而完全离”,所以这里的“pi”是表示把合理成立的不同含义集合起来,并不是集合烦恼欲。为什么?因为在这个含义里,离烦恼欲已经由第二句说出来了。由那一点,即由事欲的远离,就说明了身远离,因为它显示了远离对儿女、妻子等的占有。由前一句,即由身远离。在这里,即“完全离诸欲,离不善法”这两句中,或者从由此确定的两种远离中,虽然“不善”一词也摄入了烦恼欲,或者也摄入了一切不善法,但无论如何,离烦恼欲已经被说了,所以说“由第二句宣说离烦恼欲”。而“第二句”是指心远离。“这些”是指如前所说的两句,这是简择中的属格。断除渴爱等杂染的所依,就是断除杂染的所依。所谓浮动性,是指在处处色等境中生起渴爱,应知它的因就是事欲。愚痴性就是无明,或者恶思惟等,它的因是不如理作意,或者一切不善法。为了获得欲乐功德,也会有杀生等不净行,所以由远离这些而显明了行的清净。通过净化渴爱杂染,以及增长还灭的依止,而净化意乐,即长养阿赖耶。“于诸欲中”是简择中的处格。
Evañhi satīti evaṃ ubhayesampi kāmānaṃ saṅgahe sati. Vatthukāmehipīti ‘‘vatthukāmehi viviccevā’’tipi attho yujjatīti evaṃ yujjamānatthantarasamuccayattho pi-saddo, na kilesakāmasamuccayattho. Kasmā? Imasmiṃ atthe kilesakāmehi vivekassa dutiyapadena vuttattā. Tenāti vatthukāmavivekena. Kāyaviveko vutto hoti puttadārādipariggahavivekadīpanato. Purimenāti kāyavivekena. Etthāti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti etasmiṃ padadvaye, ito vā niddhārite vivekadvaye. Akusala-saddena yadipi kilesakāmā, sabbākusalāpi vā gahitā, sabbathā pana kilesakāmehi viveko vuttoti āha ‘‘dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato’’ti. Dutiyenāti ca cittavivekenāti attho. Etesanti yathāvuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Taṇhādisaṃkilesānaṃ vatthuno pahānaṃ saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ. Lolabhāvo nāma tattha tattha rūpādīsu taṇhuppādo, tassa hetu vatthukāmā eva veditabbā. Bālabhāvo avijjā, duccintitacintitādi vā, tassa ayonisomanasikāro, sabbepi vā akusalā dhammā hetu. Kāmaguṇādhigamahetupi pāṇātipātādiasuddhapayogo hotīti tabbivekena payogasuddhi vibhāvitā. Taṇhāsaṃkilesasodhanena, vivaṭṭūpanissayasaṃvaḍḍhanena ca ajjhāsayavisodhanaṃ āsayaposanaṃ. Kāmesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.
有多种差别,这是从欲漏、欲贪结等方面,以及从色渴爱等方面来说的,所以有种种差别。所谓“就是欲贪”,意思是它的本性就是欲的贪,而不是想要去做的欲求,也不是善法欲。说它是禅那的对立面,是因为它作为禅那的敌对面,以它为因、以它为相,所以单独提出来说。没有用不善性的共性来涵盖它,而是单独以它自己的相状来把握。如果在前一句里已经说了烦恼欲,那为什么还用复数呢?所以说“由多种差别”等等。
Anekabhedoti kāmāsavakāmarāgasaṃyojanādivasena, rūpataṇhādivasena ca anekappabhedo. Kāmacchandoyevāti kāmasabhāvoyeva chando, na kattukamyatāchando, nāpi kusalacchandoti adhippāyo. Jhānapaṭipakkhatoti jhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvato taṃhetu tannimittaṃ visuṃ vutto. Akusalabhāvasāmaññena aggahetvā visuṃ sarūpena gahito. Yadi kilesakāmova purimapade vutto, kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘anekabhedato’’tiādi.
对于其他诸如邪见、我慢、无惭、无愧等,以及与它们相应的触等,也是如此。上面将要讲到的诸禅支属于上禅支,为了显示它们各自的对立面与它们相敌对,才说与它们对立的诸盖。因为诸盖是禅支的对立面,会阻碍它们的生起。定是欲贪的对立面,因为它与贪欲的趣向正好相反,也因为它能让被种种所缘引诱而四处散乱的心专注下来。喜是嗔恚的对立面,因为通过喜悦能达到同等的安稳。寻是昏沉睡眠的对立面,因为它以如理作意的方式具有向外扩展的活动。乐是掉举恶作的对立面,因为掉举恶作的性质是不寂静、热恼,而乐的性质是寂静、清凉。伺是疑的对立面,因为它在所缘上以反复推度的方式具有类似智慧的性质。这是由大迦旃延长老所教导的、对诸藏的注释《藏释》,就在那部《藏释》里。
Aññesampi diṭṭhimānaahirikānottappādīnaṃ, taṃsahitaphassādīnañca. Upari vuccamānāni jhānaṅgāni uparijhānaṅgāni, tesaṃ attano paccanīkānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvadassanato tappaccanīkanīvaraṇavacanaṃ. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni tesaṃ pavattinivāraṇato. Samādhi kāmacchandassapaṭipakkho rāgappaṇidhiyā ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato, nānārammaṇehi palobhitassa paribbhamantassa cittassa samādhānato ca. Pīti byāpādassa paṭipakkhā pāmojjena samānayogakkhemattā. Vitakko thinamiddhassa paṭipakkho yoniso saṅkappanavasena savipphārapavattito. Sukhaṃ avūpasamānutāpasabhāvassa uddhaccakukkuccassa paṭipakkhaṃ vūpasantasītalasabhāvattā. Vicāro vicikicchāya paṭipakkho ārammaṇe anumajjanavasena paññāpaṭirūpasabhāvattā. Mahākaccānattherena desitaṃ piṭakānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā peṭakaṃ, tasmiṃ peṭake.
以五欲功德的不同为所缘,就是指以色等五欲功德的各种差别为所缘。以嗔恚事的不同等为所缘,是通过说远离嗔恚——即“他对我做了无利益的事”等——来指以嗔恚事的不同为所缘的嗔的镇伏远离;通过说远离以痴增上的昏沉睡眠等,即通过覆蔽的方式,来指以苦等、前际等不同为所缘的痴的镇伏远离。而这能镇伏欲贪、嗔恚及与之俱存的昏沉睡眠等,因为它具有与一切不善法对立的性质。一切善法由于具足那种性质,能断除一切不善法,但即使能断除,它也只是具有镇伏欲贪等的性质,因为那就是它的本质。因此,不加区分地说:对于盖、不善根等,镇伏远离已被说出。
Pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassāti rūpādipañcakāmaguṇavisesavisayassa. Āghātavatthubhedādivisayānanti byāpādavivekavacanena ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29; vibha. 960) ādiāghātavatthubhedavisayassa dosassa, mohādhikehi thinamiddhādīhi vivekavacanena paṭicchādanavasena dukkhādipubbantādibhedavisayassa mohassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto. Kāmarāgabyāpādatadekaṭṭhathinamiddhādivikkhambhakañcetaṃ sabbākusalapaṭipakkhasabhāvattā. Sabbakusalānaṃ tena sabhāvena sabbākusalappahāyakaṃ hoti, hontampi kāmarāgādivikkhambhanasabhāvameva hoti taṃsabhāvattāti avisesetvā nīvaraṇākusalamūlādīnaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotī’’ti āha.
71对于随缘而转起的自性法,不存在任何自主性,为了遮止“有自主性”这一说法,所以说“寻思即是寻”。而这个“寻思”就是对所缘的构想,因此说“即所谓思量”。因为心依靠寻的力量,好像被引导到所缘上一样,所以说它以安止于所缘为特征。就像有人依靠国王的亲信或与国王有关的朋友,登上并进入王宫,同样地,心依靠寻而登上所缘。如果这样,那么无寻的心如何登上所缘呢?还是依靠寻的力量。就像那个人由于熟悉,即使没有亲信也能毫无顾虑地进入王宫,同样地,由于熟悉,即使没有寻,无寻的心也能登上所缘。所谓“由于熟悉”,是指由于相续中称为寻的修习的那种熟悉。因为寻在相续中频繁地转起,心登上所缘就变得极为熟悉。因此,它有时即使没有寻,也在那里转起。就像与智俱行、通过思惟而极为熟悉的,有时即使没有智,也通过思惟而转起;又像原本与烦恼俱行而转起的,即使烦恼已完全断除,由于熟悉,也以烦恼习气的力量而转起;应当这样理解。最初的、或面向的击打是“击打”。周遍的、或回转的击打是“遍击”。应当知道,如同敲击“色、色,地、地”那样转起,就是“击打、遍击”。将心引向所缘、带到所缘上,就是“引导”,或者说“牵引”。
71. Yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ natthi kāci vasavattitāti vasavattibhāvanivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkanaṃ vitakko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ ‘‘vitakkanaṃ īdisamida’’nti ārammaṇassa parikappananti āha ‘‘ūhananti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Yasmā cittaṃ vitakkabalena ārammaṇaṃ abhiniruḷhaṃ viya hoti, tasmā so ārammaṇābhiniropanalakkhaṇo vutto. Yathā hi koci rājavallabhaṃ, taṃsambandhinaṃ mittaṃ vā nissāya rājagehaṃ ārohati anupavisati, evaṃ vitakkaṃ nissāya cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohatīti? Vitakkabaleneva. Yathā hi so puriso paricayena tena vināpi nirāsaṅko rājagehaṃ pavisati, evaṃ paricayena vitakkena vināpi avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Paricayenāti ca santāne pavattavitakkabhāvanāsaṅkhātena paricayena. Vitakkassa hi santāne abhiṇhaṃ pavattassa vasena cittassa ārammaṇābhiruhaṇaṃ ciraparicitaṃ. Tena taṃ kadāci vitakkena vināpi tattha pavattateva. Yathā taṃ ñāṇasahitaṃ hutvā sammasanavasena ciraparicitaṃ kadāci ñāṇavirahitampi sammasanavasena pavattati, yathā vā kilesasahitaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ sabbaso kilesarahitampi paricayena kilesavāsanāvasena pavattati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ādito, abhimukhaṃ vā hananaṃ āhananaṃ. Parito, parivattetvā vā āhananaṃ pariyāhananaṃ. ‘‘Rūpaṃ rūpaṃ, pathavī pathavī’’ti ākoṭentassa viya pavatti ‘‘āhananaṃ, pariyāhanana’’nti ca veditabbaṃ. Ānayanaṃ cittassa ārammaṇe upanayanaṃ, ākaḍḍhanaṃ vā.
随行就是跟着四处游走、来回打转。应当知道,这个差别只有在相续中才能获得,并且只有在相续中才变得明显。其余各项也是如此。推度是心对所缘的触摸,意思是擦拭。正因如此,伺被说成“像擦拭的手,像游走的手”。在那里,就是指在所缘上。对俱生法的策励,应当理解为通过称为对所缘伺察的推度方式。随结是心在所缘上仿佛不间断地持续转起。正因如此,它在《法集论》中被说为“随接性”。也正因如此,它被说成“像钟的回响,像周行”。
Anusañcaraṇaṃ anuparibbhamanaṃ. Svāyaṃ viseso santānamhi labbhamāno eva santāne pākaṭo hotīti daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Anumajjanaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa anumasanaṃ, parimajjananti attho. Tathā hi vicāro ‘‘parimajjanahattho viya, sañcaraṇahattho viyā’’ti ca vutto. Tatthāti ārammaṇe. Sahajātānaṃ anuyojanaṃ ārammaṇe anuvicāraṇasaṅkhātaanumajjanavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Anuppabandhanaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa avicchinnassa viya pavatti. Tathā hi so ‘‘anusandhānatā’’ti (dha. sa. 8) niddiṭṭho. Teneva ca ‘‘ghaṇḍānuravo viya, paribbhamanaṃ viyā’’ti ca vutto.
“在某些情况下”指的是在初禅里,以及在有限心的生起中。从伺的角度看,因为寻是粗显的,而且因为寻本身具有作为伺前导的作用,所以寻是粗的;而它的前导者——寻,就像撞钟一样。正如撞钟是最初的撞击,同样,寻以将心朝向所缘、令心安住其上的意义,就是心最初的撞击。这里用“撞击”这个词,应当理解为也包含了由撞击所产生的声音。“有扩散的”是指有动摇、有震动的状态。像来回周行一样,是为了考察有没有危险。“无间断地转起”是指在近行定或安止定中,以相续不断的方式转起。因为在那种状态下,寻已经不动摇,仿佛是进入所缘之后才转起,而不是在最初撞击的时候。“变得明显”是指:寻的投向所缘行相因为是粗显的,所以在初禅中变得明显;而在五分法的说法中,第二禅已经没有寻,因此伺的推度行相就变得明显。
Katthacīti paṭhamajjhāne, parittacittuppādesu ca. Vicārato oḷārikaṭṭhena, vicārasseva ca pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena anuravato oḷāriko, tassa ca pubbaṅgamo ghaṇḍābhighāto viya vitakko. Yathā hi ghaṇḍābhighāto paṭhamābhinipāto hoti, evaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhaniropanaṭṭhena vitakko cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto hoti. Abhighāta-ggahaṇena cettha abhighātajo saddo gahitoti veditabbo. Vipphāravāti vicalanayutto saparipphando. Paribbhamanaṃ viya parissayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ. Anuppabandhena pavattiyanti upacāre vā appanāyaṃ vā santānena pavattiyaṃ. Tattha hi vitakko niccalo hutvā ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya pavattati, na paṭhamābhinipāte. Pākaṭo hotīti vitakkassa viseso abhiniropanākāro oḷārikattā paṭhamajjhāne pākaṭo hoti, tadabhāvato pañcakanaye dutiyajjhāne vicārassa viseso anumajjanākāro pākaṭo hoti.
羊毛垫是用羊毛等做成的小垫子。压团之手,就是压饭团的那只手;也是那同一只手来回移动。圆相,是指在铜器等的上面画某种圆形或圆线。就像一棵树,即使远离花、果、枝等各个部分而不存在,也可以被称为有花有果;同样地,为了说明即使远离寻等禅支、并不存在的禅那,也可以说是有寻有伺,所以说了如树等比喻。因为禅那的修习要依人来说,所以用在此,比丘离诸欲……等依人的方式列出了诸禅。虽然《分别论》中也是依人而说,但即使在《分别论》那里,义理也应当如此处以“以此寻”等依法所说的那样来看。其意旨是:从究竟意义上说,人并不存在。义理……应当这样看待:通过显示具有禅那的人具有寻伺,同时也因为禅那本身被称为有寻有伺;或者,这里的义理应当这样理解。
Vālaṇḍupakaṃ eḷakalomādīhi katacumbaṭakaṃ. Uppīḷanahatthoti piṇḍassa uppīḷanahattho. Tasseva ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho. Maṇḍalanti kaṃsabhājanādīsu kiñci maṇḍalaṃ vaṭṭalekhaṃ karontassa. Yathā pupphaphalasākhādiavayavavinimutto avijjamānopi rukkho ‘‘sapuppho saphalo’’ti voharīyati, evaṃ vitakkādiaṅgavinimuttaṃ avijjamānampi jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti voharīyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘rukkho viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Jhānabhāvanāya puggalavasena desetabbattā ‘‘idha bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā puggalādhiṭṭhānena jhānāni uddiṭṭhānīti. Yadipi vibhaṅge puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā, attho pana tatrāpi vibhaṅgepi yathā idha ‘‘iminā ca vitakkenā’’tiādinā dhammavasena vutto, evameva daṭṭhabbo, paramatthato puggalasseva abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Attho…pe… daṭṭhabbo jhānasamaṅgino vitakkavicārasamaṅgitādassanena, jhānasseva ca savitakkasavicāratāya vuttattāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“远离”一词,是指以远离为因,这是就“远离”这个词采用状态表达(bhāvasādhana,即表达“存在/状态”的构词方式)来说的。“于远离中”则是采用行为者表达(kattusādhana)或对象表达(kammasādhana)。因为“已远离的”这个词,既包含“从诸盖中分离而存在”,也包含“被诸盖所远离”,所以两种构词解释都已经涵盖在内了。
Vivekāti vivekā hetubhūtāti viveka-saddassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha. Viveketi kattusādhanataṃ, kammasādhanataṃ vā. ‘‘Vivitto’’ti hi iminā nīvaraṇehi vinābhūto tehi vivecitoti ca sādhanadvayampi saṅgahitamevāti.
72“Pīṇayati”的意思是让人满足,或者让它增长。“Sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā”的意思是它以完全令人欢喜为特征。“Pīṇanarasā”的意思是它的作用是滋养。“Pharaṇarasā”的意思是它以殊胜的色法遍满身体的作用。“Udaggabhāvo”就是高昂振奋的状态。“Khuddikā”是指微小的,只引起一点点身毛竖立,然后就消失了,不会再生起。“Khaṇikā”是指它反复多次生起。“Ubbegato pharaṇā niccalattā, ciraṭṭhitikattā ca paṇītatarā”的意思是:遍满喜比涌跃喜因不动摇、安住长久而更殊胜。“Cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā”的意思是前往 Puṇṇavallika 寺的塔院后。“Pakatiyā diṭṭhārammaṇavasena”的意思是依于先前在大塔所取的相(所缘)。“Citrageṇḍuko”的意思是以种种色彩制成的球。“Upanissaye”的意思是在附近,或者在那座寺院的依止处、行境处,这就是其含义。
72.Pīṇayatīti tappeti, vaḍḍheti vā. Sampiyāyanalakkhaṇāti paritussanalakkhaṇā. Pīṇanarasāti paribrūhanarasā. Pharaṇarasāti paṇītarūpehi kāyassa byāpanarasā. Udaggabhāvo odagyaṃ. Khuddikā lahuṃ lomahaṃsanamattaṃ katvā bhinnā na puna uppajjati. Khaṇikā bahulaṃ uppajjati. Ubbegato pharaṇā niccalattā, ciraṭṭhitikattā ca paṇītatarā. Cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvāti puṇṇavallikavihāre cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā. Pakatiyā diṭṭhārammaṇavasenāti pubbe mahācetiyaṃ gahitārammaṇavasena. Citrageṇḍuko vicitrākārena katageṇḍuko. Upanissayeti samīpe, tassa vā vihārassa nissayabhūte, gocaraṭṭhānabhūteti attho.
在家的庭院里,就是指家里的院子。在山的顶峰上建造的塔,被称为“虚空塔”。仅仅以已经取到的相为因,是指为了礼塔和听法,通过“这些真是有福啊”等方式所取到的善相,以此作为原因。或者,以此取相,故为取相;也就是按前面所说的方式生起的心,与那已经取相的心一起。Pakkhandanti 是进入的意思。Anuparipphuṭanti 是逐一、周遍地触及,也就是完全遍满。这就是它的含义。
Gharājireti gehaṅgaṇe. Pabbatasikhare katacetiyaṃ ‘‘ākāsacetiya’’nti vuttaṃ. Gahitanimittenevāti cetiyavandanaṃ, dhammassavanañca uddissa ‘‘dhaññā vatime’’tiādinā gahitakusalanimitteneva kāraṇabhūtena. Gahitaṃ vā nimittaṃ etenāti gahitanimittaṃ, vuttākārena pavattacittaṃ, tena gahitanimitteneva cittena saha. Pakkhandanti anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Anuparipphuṭanti anu anu samantato phuṭaṃ, sabbaso anuvisaṭanti attho.
喜以轻安为相而取胎,也就是以令成熟的方式走向成熟。与安止相应的喜,才是安止定的圆满者。而刹那定的圆满者和近行定的圆满者,离安止定更远,所以不提及这两者,只说“其中,那安止定的……”。达到与定相应,是指先前与近行定相应,逐渐增长之后,达到与安止定相应。
Passaddhiyā nimittabhāvena gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī. Paripācanavasena paripākaṃ gacchantī. Appanāsampayuttāva pīti appanāsamādhipūrikā. Khaṇikasamādhipūrikā ca upacārasamādhipūrikā ca appanāsamādhissa vidūratarāti tadubhayaṃ anāmasanto ‘‘tāsu yā appanāsamādhissā’’tiādimāha . Samādhisampayogaṃ gatāti pubbe upacārasamādhinā sampayuttā hutvā anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā appanāsamādhinā sampayogaṃ gatā.
73“Sukhayati”就是“乐”的意思,是说它让与自己相应的法获得滋味。这里用“作者”这一表述,是间接得来的说法,目的是排除另有别的作者;如果按直接意义来说,只能成立“状态本身”这一义,所以说“sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ”。因为它具有可意的本性,所以能让具备它的人或相应法在自身中感到愉悦,因此叫“sāta”,是把da变成ta。“Sāta”就是“甜蜜”的意思。以它为特相,就是“sātalakkhṇaṃ”。Upabrūhanaṃ是相应法的增长、增广。像苦一样不舍弃,像不苦不乐一样不漠视,而一再一再地执取,或者说是饶益性、资助。在某些情况下,指初禅等。Paṭilābhatuṭṭhi是依获得而生起的满足。Paṭiladdharasānubhavana是体验所获得之境的味,因此从自性上分别显示喜与乐。凡有喜处,那里就有乐,所以说喜与乐有绝对结合,如寻一样。凡有乐处,那里不一定有喜,所以说乐与喜非绝对结合,如伺一样。由此显示喜乐在绝对结合与非绝对结合方面的差别。Kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāraṃ,即无水荒原。Vanameva vanantaṃ。Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye,即在获得可意之境时,在体验所获得之味时,在听闻、看见林荫等时,在进入、受用时。Pākaṭabhāvato,即依次因为喜与乐的明显状态。
73. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, attanā sampayuttadhamme laddhassāde karotīti attho. Svāyaṃ kattuniddeso pariyāyaladdho dhammato aññassa kattu nivattanattho, nippariyāyena pana bhāvasādhanameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhanaṃ sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Iṭṭhasabhāvattā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ, sampayuttadhamme vā attani sādayatīti sātaṃ da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Sātaṃ ‘‘madhura’’nti vadanti. Sātaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Upabrūhanaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ saṃvaḍḍhanaṃ. Dukkhaṃ viya avissajjetvā adukkhamasukhā viya anajjhupekkhitvā anu anu gaṇhanaṃ, upakāritā vā anuggaho. Katthaci paṭhamajjhānādike. Paṭilābhatuṭṭhīti paṭilābhavasena uppajjanakatuṭṭhi. Paṭiladdharasānubhavananti paṭiladdhassa ārammaṇarasassa anubhavananti sabhāvato pītisukhāni vibhajitvā dasseti. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhanti vitakkassa viya itarena pītiyā sukhena accantasaṃyogamāha. ‘‘Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pītī’’ti vicārassa viya vitakkena sukhassa pītiyā anaccantasaṃyogaṃ. Tena accantānaccantasaṃyogitāya pītisukhānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti. Kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāraṃ, nirudakamaruṭṭhānaṃ. Vanameva vanantaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samayeti iṭṭhārammaṇassa paṭilābhasamaye, paṭiladdhassa rasānubhavanasamaye, vanacchāyādīnaṃ savanadassanasamaye, pavesaparibhogasamaye ca. Pākaṭabhāvatoti yathākkamaṃ pītisukhānaṃ vibhūtabhāvato.
对于“离生喜乐”这一说法,在这里的第一种含义中,“离生”指的是禅那。而从“喜乐”这个词以及含义的差别来看,在“此禅那的”或“在此禅那中”这个地方,应该看到有个“a”字(即词尾变化)。在第二种含义中,喜和乐本身就是离生的。“离生喜乐”(vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ)是一个不同词组合成的复合词,并且没有省略第六格(生格,paccatta)的语尾。如果省略了语尾,就应该读作“离生喜乐”(vivekajapītisukhaṃ),这就是两者的差别。
Vivekajaṃ pītisukhanti ettha purimasmiṃ atthe vivekajanti jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Pītisukhasaddato ca atthiatthavisesato ‘‘assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne’’ti ettha a-kāro daṭṭhabbo. Dutiye pītisukhameva vivekajaṃ. ‘‘Vivekajaṃpītisukha’’nti ca aññapadatthasamāso, paccattaniddesassa ca alopo kato. Lope vā sati ‘‘vivekajapītisukha’’nti pāṭhoti ayaṃ viseso.
在“upasampajja”这个词里,为了说明前缀upa和saṃ就像在“upalabbhati”“saṃbhuñjati”等词中那样没有实际意义,先举了“upagantvā”等说法;接着为了再说明它们是有实际意义的,又说了“upasampādayitvā”等,所以这个词的意思是“到达”或“完成”。“Iriyanti”指的是行为。“Vutti”等是它的同义词。所谓“pālanā”,就是用其他威仪来守护、保护某一种威仪的障碍。
Upasampajjāti ettha upa-saṃ-saddā ‘‘upalabbhati, saṃbhuñjatī’’tiādīsu viya niratthakāti dassetuṃ ‘‘upagantvā’’tiādiṃ vatvā puna tesaṃ sātthakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upasampādayitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā patvā, sādhetvāti vā attho. Iriyanti kiriyaṃ. Vuttiādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Pālanāti hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ iriyāpathantarehi rakkhaṇā.
五支舍断等的注释
Pañcaṅgavippahīnādivaṇṇanā
74五支被镇伏而断除,所以叫“五支被断”。这里“被断”一词,就像“火已置”中的“置”一词那样,应当理解为是他人所说的话;或者说,以五支而被断除,所以叫“五支被断”。难道其他不善法不被此禅那断除吗?那为什么只说“五支被断”呢?于是说“虽然……”等。因为证得禅那的人,在未与禅那相应的时刻,与禅那对立的贪心等仍然会生起,所以说“在禅那刹那”。“被断除”意思是消失,不再生起。“于单一所缘”:指依地遍等而具有单一性质,或者指能带来单一性、称为一境性的所缘。“彼”:指那颗被种种境界所诱惑的心。“为了断除欲界”:为了断除、超越那被种种境界所充斥的欲界,不修习作为其道的禅那。“无间断”:不被散乱所间隔,意思是相续。“不适业”:不堪能,不适合修习之业的意思。“被掉举与恶作所征服”:被掉举和恶作所压倒。“流转”:因为无法安住而流转,意思是由于没有安住、没有等持。“被疑所害”:由于没有殊胜的思择,被“世尊是否真是正自觉者,还是不是”这样,以及以“地、地”等作意、“是否有禅那,还是没有”等所生起的疑所损害。“不登升”:因为没有修习的相。“特别成为禅那的障碍”:因为是等持等的直接对立面,所以障碍禅那的证得。
74. Pañca aṅgāni vikkhambhanavasena pahīnāni etassāti pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ. ‘‘Agyāhito’’ti ettha āhita-saddassa viya vippahīna-saddassettha paravacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, pañcahi aṅgehi vippahīnanti vā pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ. Nanu aññepi akusalā dhammā iminā jhānena pahīyanti, atha kasmā pañcaṅgavippahīnatāva vuccatīti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Jhānalābhinopi ajhānasamaṅgikāle jhānapaṭipakkhalobhacittādīnaṃ pavattisabbhāvato ‘‘jhānakkhaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. Pahīyantīti vigacchanti, nappavattantīti attho. Ekattārammaṇeti pathavīkasiṇādivasena ekasabhāve, ekaggatāsaṅkhāte ekattāvahe vā ārammaṇe. Tanti taṃ nānāvisayapalobhitaṃ cittaṃ. Kāmadhātuppahānāyāti nānāvisayasamūpabyūḷhāya kāmadhātuyā pahānāya samatikkamāya paṭipadaṃ jhānaṃ nappaṭipajjati. Nirantaranti vikkhepena anantaritaṃ, sahitanti attho. Akammaññanti akammanīyaṃ, bhāvanākammassa ayogyanti attho. Uddhaccakukkuccaparetanti uddhaccakukkuccena abhibhūtaṃ. Paribbhamati anavaṭṭhānato, avaṭṭhānassa samādhānassa abhāvatoti attho. Vicikicchāya upahatanti sātisayassa vicārassa abhāvato ‘‘sammāsambuddho nu kho bhagavā, na nu kho’’ti, ‘‘pathavī pathavī’’tiādinā manasikārena, ‘‘jhānaṃ siyā nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā ca pavattāya vicikicchāya upahataṃ. Nārohati appaṭipattinimittattā. Visesena jhānantarāyakarattāti samādhiādīnaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvena jhānādhigamassa antarāyakaraṇato.
由它们,即作为证得禅那之缘的寻与伺。对于已成就无散乱精勤的人,即由此而成就等持、已圆满修习精勤的人。由于心的精勤成就而生起,即依上述修习精勤的成就而生起。喜,就是滋养,以修习而令满足。增长,就是以修习令心增长,应这样连接。彼,就是心。与其余相应法,就是与其余触等法俱在,平等而正确地执持,应这样连接。依根之平等性而平等,就是令敌对法远离,以没有昏沉和掉举而正确地安立,这是它的意思。因为一境性以等持的作用,在禅那刹那令心及相应法随顺自己,使它们殊胜地等持。依生起的方式,就是依缘而生起的方式。在这些寻等之中,禅那生起时,就依禅那的称谓而说禅那在那里生起。因此说“所以……”等。又以“然而如同……”等,用譬喻令此义更为明了。
Tehīti jhānādhigamassa paccayabhūtehi vitakkavicārehi. Avikkhepāya sampāditappayogassāti tato evaṃ samādhānāya nipphāditabhāvanāpayogassa. Cetaso payogasampattisambhavāti yathāvuttabhāvanāpayogasampattisamuṭṭhānā. Pīti pīṇanaṃ bhāvanāvasena tappanaṃ. Upabrūhanaṃ bhāvanāvasena parivuddhiṃ cetaso karotīti sambandho. Nanti cittaṃ. Sasesasampayuttadhammanti avasiṭṭhaphassādidhammasahitaṃ, samaṃ sammā ca ādhiyatīti sambandho. Indriyasamatāvasena samaṃ, paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ. Dūrībhāve līnuddhaccābhāvena sammā ca ṭhapetīti attho. Ekaggatā hi samādhānakiccena cittaṃ, sampayuttadhamme ca attānaṃ anuvattāpentī jhānakkhaṇe sātisayaṃ samāhite karotīti. Uppattivasenāti yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjanavasena . Etesu vitakkādīsu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti tattheva jhānavohārato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yathā panā’’tiādināpi upamāvasena tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti.
从本性心,就是从原本的欲界心。极清净,就是非常清净,意思是更加敏锐。具有一切部分,就是具有一切组成部分,意思是没有遗漏。未触,就是没有接触。于所缘中触,是指依安止而现起的心一境性,好像从四面八方遍触所缘一样,所以才这样说。那么,为什么在这里的禅那文中没有直接提到的心一境性却被提出来了呢?针对这个追问,就说“其中,心一境性”等等。其中,就是在那些禅支当中。没有被列出,就是没有以自性相列出,但从总相来说,已经被“禅那”这个词包含进去了。因为这样说的缘故,就是以自性相来说的,所以心一境性本身就是禅支,应该这样理解。以什么意图呢?就是为了说明与寻等一起运作的法,带着这个意图而作了“有寻有伺”等解说。正是这个意图,被世尊在《分别》中解说“心一境性”时阐明了。因此,不应该认为它在禅那文中没有被提到。
Pakaticittatoti pākatikakāmāvacaracittato. Suvisadenāti suṭṭhu visadena, paṭutarenāti attho. Sabbāvantanti sabbāvayavavantaṃ, anavasesanti attho. Apphuṭanti asamphuṭṭhaṃ. Ārammaṇesu phusitāti appanāvasena pavattamānā cittekaggatā samantato ārammaṇaṃ pharantī viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Kasmā panettha jhānapāṭhe aggahitā cittekaggatā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha cittekaggatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu jhānaṅgesu. Na niddiṭṭhāti sarūpato na niddiṭṭhā, sāmaññato pana jhānaggahaṇena gahitā. Evaṃ vuttattāti sarūpeneva vuttattā, aṅgameva cittekaggatāti sambandho. Yena adhippāyenāti yena vitakkādīhi saha vattantaṃ dhammaṃ dīpetuṃ tassa pakāsanādhippāyena ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā uddeso kato. So eva adhippāyo tena bhagavatā vibhaṅge ‘‘cittekaggatā’’ti niddisantena pakāsito. Tasmā sā jhānapāṭhe aggahitāti na cintetabbaṃ.
三种善美的注释
Tividhakalyāṇavaṇṇanā
75依初、中、后来说:就是依禅那的初、中、后来说。依特相来说:就是依那些初、中、后在其安止中应当被标知的状态来说。
75.Ādimajjhapariyosānavasenāti jhānassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena. Lakkhaṇavasenāti tesaṃyeva appanāyaṃ lakkhitabbabhāvavasena.
这里说的“其中”,是指在阐明善美特相的那个地方。“行道清净”是说:依靠它来修行禅那,所以叫行道,也就是以种姓智为终点、属于前分阶段的修习方法。从障碍中净化出来就是清净,行道的清净就是行道清净。这个行道清净,因为在禅那生起的那一刹那才能得到,所以经中说“行道清净是初”。舍的增修:因为没有什么需要净除的,所以是以属于禅那的中舍的作用完成来增修。这个舍的增修,特别是在禅那住立的那一刹那才能得到,因此说“舍的增修是中”。庆慰:是以成就彼处诸法之不超越等的智之作用完成而遍净。这个庆慰,因为在禅那最后的那一刹那才明显,所以说“庆慰是后”。这三种特相,就是心从障碍中清净的行相、中间寂止相的行进方式、在其中投入的方式,这三种是禅那最初生起那一刹那证得安止的特相。如果没有这些行相,就不能证得安止;没有安止,这些也就没有。初善,也因为它是清净的行道。因为具足如上所说的特相,又因为特相圆满,所以是三特相具足。按这个道理,中、后特相的连接也应当这样理解。
Tatrāti tasmiṃ kalyāṇatālakkhaṇānaṃ vibhāvane. Paṭipadāvisuddhīti paṭipajjati jhānaṃ etāyāti paṭipadā, gotrabhupariyosāno pubbabhāgiyo bhāvanānayo. Paripanthato visujjhanaṃ visuddhi, paṭipadāya visuddhi paṭipadāvisuddhi. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā jhānassa uppādakkhaṇe labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhi ādī’’ti. Upekkhānubrūhanāti visodhetabbatādīnaṃ abhāvato jhānapariyāpannāya tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccanipphattiyā anubrūhanā. Sā panāyaṃ visesato jhānassa ṭhitikkhaṇe labbhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe’’ti. Sampahaṃsanāti tattha dhammānaṃ anativattanādisādhakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena pariyodapanā. Sā pana yasmā jhānassa osānakkhaṇe pākaṭā hoti , tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsanā pariyosāna’’nti. Imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇānīti paripanthato cittassa visujjhanākāro , majjhimassa samathanimittassa paṭipajjanākāro, tattha pakkhandanākāroti imāni tīṇi jhānassa ādito uppādakkhaṇe appanāpattilakkhaṇāni tehi ākārehi vinā appanāpattiyā abhāvato, asati ca appanāya tadabhāvato. Ādikalyāṇañceva visuddhipaṭipadattā. Yathāvuttehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatattā, sampannalakkhaṇattā ca tilakkhaṇasampannañca. Iminā nayena majjhapariyosānalakkhaṇānañca yojanā veditabbā.
禅那靠这个来积聚,所以叫“资具”,也就是种种转向的预备工作。和资具一起的,叫“有资具”,它本身就是“有资具的”。“近行”说的是单一转向的近行。因为策励等作用的前分阶段已经通过修习本身成就了,所以在那个单一转向的近行中成就的舍,到了禅那的刹那就被称为“已修习”,因此说“舍的修习名为安止”。依靠所证得的禅那,那种心生起欢喜、满足的状态,是就它以观察的方式运作而说的,所以说“喜悦名为观察”。“一部分人”指无畏山住者。他们这样解释行道清净等,那是不对的。因为若那样说,就成了用非禅那的法来赞叹禅那的功德。不同的地界并不属于另一地界。为了显示这与巴利圣典相违,所以说了“然而由于……”等。其中,“心达一境”是指诸根以一味的状态、以及一境性达到顶点,与此相应而达到单一状态,所以叫“达一境”,也就是与相应法俱行、达到安止的心。紧接着就说它本身是行道清净、跃入等。因此,由于巴利圣典中说行道清净等是在同一个安止心刹那中,所以是依于来势,即依于预备行的来势。“不超越等”中的“等”字,包含了诸根一味性、与此相应的精进运载、以及反复习行。能遍净的,就是令清净、令光明的。这里应当知道,成就“不超越”等状态,正是智的作用的完成。
Sambharīyati jhānaṃ etenāti sambhāro, nānāvajjanaparikammaṃ. Saha sambhārenāti sasambhāro, so eva sasambhāriko. Upacāroti ekāvajjanūpacāramāha. Paggahādikiccassa pubbabhāge bhāvanāya eva sādhitattā yā tattha ekāvajjanūpacāre siddhā ajjhupekkhanā, sā jhānakkhaṇe paribrūhitā nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā’’ti. Yathādhigataṃ jhānaṃ nissāya yo pahaṭṭhākāro cittassa paritoso, taṃ paccavekkhaṇāvasena pavattaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇā’’ti. Eketi abhayagirivāsino. Te hi evaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhiādike vaṇṇayanti, tadayuttaṃ. Tathā hi sati ajjhānadhammehi jhānassa guṇasaṃkittanaṃ nāma kataṃ hoti. Na hi bhūmantaraṃ bhūmantarapariyāpannaṃ hoti. Pāḷiyā cetaṃ viruddhanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ekattagataṃ cittanti indriyānaṃ ekarasabhāvena, ekaggatāya ca sikhāppattiyā tadanuguṇaṃ ekattaṃ gatanti ekattagataṃ, sasampayuttaṃ appanāpattacittaṃ. Tasseva paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandatādi anantarameva vuccati. Tasmāti yasmā ekasmiṃyeva appanācittakkhaṇe paṭipadāvisuddhiādi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā āgamanavasenāti parikammāgamanavasena. Anativattanādīti ādi-saddena indriyekarasatātadupagavīriyavāhanāsevanāni saṅgaṇhāti. Pariyodāpakassāti parisodhakassa pabhassarabhāvakarassa. Anativattanādibhāvasādhanameva cettha ñāṇassa kiccanipphatti veditabbā.
在那每一个场合,意思是指四五个心量的安止路。此后从障碍。虽然“心清净”这句话看起来没有区分地泛指,但从遍作清净来说,安止清净确实更为殊胜。因此说“由于清净”等。成为远离障碍的状态,是指心被某种障碍覆盖,在此之前无法进入中间的止相,如今远离那障碍、镇伏那障碍,就是远离障碍的意思。不接近昏沉和掉举这两种极端,所以叫“中”;特别平息了敌对的法,所以叫“止”;是修行者殊胜快乐的因,所以叫“相”——这就是中间的止相。因此说“正是均等现行的安止定”。紧接着的“前心”,是指作为那安止心的无间缘的前一个心,也就是种姓心。依同一相续转变的方式,就像“那同一个牛奶变成了酪”一样,虽然有有限与广大的区别、有缘与缘所生的区别,但依同一相续的转变、依同一性的方式。那种状态,就是以安止定而等持的状态。因为这样行道的缘故,就是以所说的方式在行道。因为就在那个刹那,当心进入那种中间的止相的状态时,正是通过进入那种状态、通过安止定而等持,所以叫做跃入其中。“前心”是指在安止心之前的心,即种姓心。能成就存在的相状,是指在那个心中,成就了障碍清净、中间止、行道、跃入这些相状;以那种方式成就,就是以那些方式成就的意思。因为那些相状本身,由于缘的殊胜,在禅那刹那成就时,被称为“行道清净”,它们被说成是成就了禅那那种殊胜。就在生起的刹那,也就是获得自身的时候。如果是这样,那些相状怎么成就呢?回答说“依来势”。
Tasminti tasmiṃ vāre, catupañcacittaparimāṇāya appanāvīthiyanti attho. Tato paripanthato. Cittaṃ visujjhatīti yadipi āgamanaṃ gahetuṃ avisesena viya vuttaṃ, parikammavisuddhito pana appanāvisuddhi sātisayāva. Tenāha ‘‘visuddhattā’’tiādi. Āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvāti yenāvaraṇena āvaṭattā cittaṃ tato pubbe majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjituṃ na sakkoti, tena vivittaṃ hutvā, taṃ vikkhambhetvāti attho. Līnuddhaccasaṅkhātānaṃ ubhinnaṃ antānaṃ anupagamanena majjhimo, savisesaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vūpasamanato samatho, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato nimittañcāti majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘samappavatto appanāsamādhiyevā’’ti. Tadanantaraṃ pana purimacittanti tassa appanācittassa anantarapaccayabhūtaṃ purimaṃ cittaṃ, gotrabhucittanti attho. Ekasantatipariṇāmanayenāti yathā ‘‘tadeva khīraṃ dadhisampanna’’nti, evaṃ satipi parittamahaggatabhāvabhede, paccayapaccayuppannabhāvabhede ca ekissā eva santatiyā pariṇāmūpagamananayena ekattanayavasena. Tathattanti tathabhāvaṃ appanāsamādhivasena samāhitabhāvaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannattāti vuttākārena paṭipajjamānattā. Yasmiñhi khaṇe tathattaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathattupagamanena appanāsamādhinā samāhitabhāvūpagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Purimacitteti appanācittassa purimasmiṃ citte gotrabhucitte. Vijjamānākāranipphādikāti tasmiṃ citte vijjamānānaṃ paripanthavisuddhimajjhimasamathapaṭipattipakkhandanākārānaṃ nipphādikā, tenākārena nipphajjamānāti attho. Teyeva hi ākārā paccayavisesato jhānakkhaṇe nipphajjamānā ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhī’’ti laddhasamaññā jhānassa taṃ visesaṃ nipphādentā viya vuttā. Uppādakkhaṇeyevāti attalābhavelāyameva. Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ te ākārā nipphajjantīti āha ‘‘āgamanavasenā’’ti.
“它的”指的是心。巴利圣典中说“对清净心加以放舍”,这是依补特伽罗而说的,所以注释说“不作功用”。而在这里,止的修行以及进入那种状态,就是达到止的状态,所以说“通过进入止的状态”。已经断除了烦恼杂染,以单一的状态安住:先前修行时想“怎样才能断除烦恼杂染”,如今因为通过止的修行已经断除了那些烦恼,所以没有烦恼的喧杂,以单一的状态安住在禅那心中。在通过盖障清净、中等止的修行、跃入而获得增长、被修习的禅那心中,中舍性获得了机会,在与它相应的诸法中平等地运作,就好像在修习它们一样,因此说“应当知道,舍的修习是由中舍性的作用而来的”。
Tassāti cittassa. ‘‘Visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhatī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.158) puggalādhiṭṭhānena āgatāti ‘‘byāpāraṃ akaronto’’ti āha. Samathapaṭipattitathattupagamanañca idha samathabhāvāpattiyevāti āha ‘‘samathabhāvūpagamanenā’’ti. Kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassāti pubbe ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pajaheyya’’nti paṭipannassa idāni samathapaṭipattiyā tassa pahīnattā kilesasaṅgaṇikābhāvena ekattena upaṭṭhitassa jhānacittassa. Paripanthavisuddhimajjhimasamathapaṭipattipakkhandanehi vuddhippattiyā anubrūhite jhānacitte laddhokāsā tatramajjhattupekkhā sampayuttesu samavāhitabhāvena pavattamānā te anubrūhentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā’’ti.
凡这些俱行法——这是连接关系。其中,指那个禅那心中。因为彼此不超越而执行作用,就像同系在一个轭上,所以叫俱行。以解脱之味,也就是以解脱的作用,或者以解脱的成就。这位瑜伽行者。“运载”就是使转起。“它的”指禅那心的。在那个刹那,指坏灭刹那。因为在生起刹那之后,从住立刹那开始,重复缘就转起了。那些行相,就是彼此不超越等,是诸法在那里转起的行相。重复缘本身,也是作为重复缘的诸法转起的行相。在杂染与清净中:不使定与慧具有同味,是修习的杂染;使之具有同味,是清净。其余各处也是这样。如此,在这些杂染与清净中,以神通智预先看见种种过患、过失、功德、利益之后,如是使彼此不超越等行相生起,如此因修习而令喜悦,也就是依那智而令清净。这里,清净就是令喜悦。那些行相因为已经成就,所以说“诸法……应知”,这是以结语的方式显示相释论开头所说的内容。
Ye panete yuganaddhadhammāti sambandho. Tatthāti tasmiṃ jhānacitte. Aññamaññānativattanavasena kiccakaraṇato yuge naddhā baddhā viya yuganaddhā. Vimuttirasenāti vimuccanakiccena, vimuccanasampattiyā vā. Esa yogī. Vāhayatīti pavatteti. Assāti jhānacittassa. Tasmiṃ khaṇeti bhaṅgakkhaṇe. Uppādakkhaṇe atīte hi ṭhitikkhaṇato paṭṭhāya āsevanā pavattati nāma. Te ākārāti aññamaññānativattanādayo tattha dhammānaṃ pavattiākārā. Āsevanāpi hi āsevanapaccayabhāvīnaṃ dhammānaṃ pavattiākāroyeva. Saṃkilesavodānesūti samādhipaññānaṃ samarasatāya akaraṇaṃ bhāvanāya saṃkileso, karaṇaṃ vodānaṃ. Tathā sesesupi. Evametesu saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ guṇaṃ puretaraṃ pāṭihāriyañāṇena disvā yathā aññamaññānativattanādayo honti, tathā bhāvanāya sampahaṃsitattā teneva ñāṇena visodhitattā. Visodhanaṃ hettha sampahaṃsanaṃ. Te ākārā yasmā nipphannā, tasmā ‘‘dhammānaṃ…pe… veditabbāti vutta’’nti lakkhaṇasaṃvaṇṇanāya ādimhi vuttaṃ nigamanavasena dasseti.
有人问:因为依靠舍,智才变得明显,这句话跟前后文有什么关系?为什么只说随喜是终点,而不说舍的修习?针对这个质疑,才说了“其中,因为依靠舍,智才变得明显”。“其中”指的就是那个修习之心。依靠舍而智变得明显,意思是:在安止的时候,由于修习平等地运转,对立面已经被断除,在策励等方面也不需要再费力造作,所以只剩下旁观。正是针对这一点,才说“有时心旁观,以清净心旁观”等等。而这种旁观,是依靠智的作用才完成的,尤其是因为安止的运作本身就以智为工具,所以这是由结果推知原因。因为依靠舍,智才变得明显,所以作为智之作用的随喜才被称为终点,这就是其中的关联。
‘‘Yasmā upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti ko sambandho. Kasmā sampahaṃsanāva pariyosānanti vuttā, na upekkhānubrūhanāti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha yasmā upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhāvanācitte. Upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti appanākāle bhāvanāya samappavattiyā, paṭipakkhassa ca pahānato paggahādīsu byāpārassa akātabbato ajjhupekkhanāva hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘samaye cittassa ajjhupekkhanā, visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhatī’’ti ca ādi. Sā panāyaṃ ajjhupekkhanā ñāṇassa kiccasiddhiyā hoti, visesato ñāṇasādhanattā appanābyāpārassāti phalena kāraṇānumānañāyena. Yasmā upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā pariyosānanti vuttāti sambandho.
现在,为了用巴利经文来证明上面所说的义理,所以说了“如所说”等话。“如是策励之心”:就像修习心不会落入懈怠那一方,依靠精进觉支所依诸法的反复修习而被策励起来。“善加旁观”:即使是在策励的时候,由于以定与精进平衡的方式被策励,所以认真地旁观,这时平等旁观就获得了机会。然而那种旁观,是依舍的方式、依先前生起的护持智慧的方式,成为安止智的作用,所以说“依智慧的方式,慧根变得增上”。正因为慧根增上,正在旁观者的安止心才能从种种不同种类的烦恼——以五盖为首的烦恼——中解脱。依解脱的方式,依解脱的方式。“依智慧的方式”:依先前生起的护持智慧的方式。“由于解脱”:由于从种种烦恼中解脱。那些法,即信等法,特别是信、慧、精进、定,成为一味,作用相同。这样,通过诸根一味的意义,修习正在完成时就是智的作用,所以说“成为智作用的随喜是终结”。如此,通过三种行道清净所获得的殊胜,通过三种舍的修习,由于慧根特别增上,四种随喜都能成就。依来处、舍与智的作用,十种行相都应在禅那中理解。
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathāpaggahitaṃ cittanti yathā bhāvanācittaṃ kosajjapakkhe na patati, tathā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bahulīkāravasena paggahitaṃ. Sādhukaṃ ajjhupekkhatīti paggaṇhantenāpi samādhissa vīriyasamatāyojanavasena paggahitattā sakkaccaṃ ajjhupekkhati, tatramajjhattupekkhā okāsaṃ labhati. Taṃ pana ajjhupekkhanaṃ upekkhāvasena pubbe pavattapārihāriyapaññāvasena appanāpaññāya kiccādhikatāti āha ‘‘paññāvasena paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī’’ti. Tassa adhimattattā eva ajjhupekkhantasseva nānāsabhāvehi nīvaraṇapamukhehi kilesehi appanācittaṃ vimuccati. Vimokkhavasena vimuccanavasena. Paññāvasenāti pubbe pavattapārihāriyapaññāvasena. Vimuttattāti nānākilesehi vimuttattā eva. Te dhammā saddhādayo, visesato saddhāpaññāvīriyasamādhayo ca ekarasā samānakiccā honti. Evamayaṃ indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā nipphajjamānā ñāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā pariyosāna’’nti. Evaṃ tividhāya paṭipadāvisuddhiyā laddhavisesāya tividhāya upekkhānubrūhanāya sātisayaṃ paññindriyassa adhimuttabhāvena catubbidhāpi sampahaṃsanā sijjhatīti āgamanupekkhā ñāṇakiccavasena dasapi ākārā jhāne eva veditabbā.
“计数次第”:就是依计数的次第,或者仅仅把计数次第当作“第一”,这就是它的意思。以此指出教说的顺序。“最初生起的,所以叫第一”:这是指修行实践的次序;这里“生起”就是已证得的意思。“应当最先进入的,所以叫第一”:这个说法并不是绝对的定义,因为在注释书里已经被否定了,所以这里没有采用。为了说明在“所缘观照”和“特相观照”这两种禅那中,这里指的是哪一种禅那,所以说“从所缘观照”。就像用地遍作所缘时,以眼识观照自己各自的所缘之色一样。所谓“烧尽对立之法”,就是烧尽、压伏并舍弃五盖等对立之法。所谓“以整体之义”,就是按前面所说的方式,不论已作或未作,在取定的地界、地圆中,以遍满整个所缘之义。因为对它并不是只取一部分作为所缘。由于依止地遍,所以相就叫地遍,就像说“床在发出响声”一样。由于与它俱行,所以禅那就叫地遍,就像说“枪在行走”一样。
Gaṇanānupubbatāti gaṇanānupubbatāya, gaṇanānupubbatāmattaṃ vā paṭhamanti idanti attho. Tena desanākkamaṃ ulliṅgeti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ uppannanti paṭhama’’nti iminā paṭipattikkamaṃ, uppannanti hi adhigatanti attho. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ samāpajjitabbanti paṭhama’’nti idaṃ pana na ekantalakkhaṇanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 160) paṭisiddhattā idha na gahitaṃ. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti duvidhe jhāne idhādhippetajjhānameva dassetuṃ ‘‘ārammaṇūpanijjhānato’’ti vuttaṃ. Pathavīkasiṇasaṅkhātassa attano attano ārammaṇassa rūpaṃ viya cakkhunā upanijjhāyanato. Paccanīkajhāpanatoti nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ dahanato vikkhambhanavasena pajahanato. Sakalaṭṭhenāti heṭṭhā vuttanayena kate vā akate vā paricchijja gahite pathavībhāge pathavīmaṇḍale sakalārammaṇakaraṇaṭṭhena. Na hi tassa ekadesamārammaṇaṃ karīyati. Pathavīkasiṇasannissayatāya nimittaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Taṃsahacaraṇato jhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti.
关于长久住世的成就的注释
Ciraṭṭhitisampādanavaṇṇanā
7676. 站在靶位上,用箭射穿毛发,就叫射毛者。但这里指的是射穿那已经裂成许多缕的毛发的纤维的人,这才叫射毛者。也就是由这位射毛者。厨子就是做饭的人。为了详细解释“应当把握各种相状”这个简要说法,所以说了“譬如”等话。其中,善巧就是非常熟练。弓箭手就是射箭的人。业就是合适。所踏之处就是射箭时脚所踩踏的位置。相状就是执弓、执箭等姿态。应当把握就是应当观察。适合的食物等,这里的“等”字应当理解为也包括没有说到的各种情况。这样一来,也就等于说了对季节、修习相状等因缘条件的观察。在那初起的定心中。
76. Lakkhaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ sarena vālaṃ vijjhatīti vālavedhī. Idha pana anekadhā bhinnassa vālassa aṃsuṃ vijjhanto ‘‘vālavedhī’’ti adhippeto. Tenavālavedhinā. Sūdenāti bhattakārena. ‘‘Ākārā pariggahetabbā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sukusaloti suṭṭhu cheko. Dhanuggahoti issāso. Kammanti yogyaṃ. Akkantapadānanti vijjhanakāle akkamanavasena pavattapadānaṃ. Ākāranti dhanujiyāsarānaṃ gahitākāraṃ. Pariggaṇheyyāti upadhāreyya. Bhojanasappāyādayoti ādi-saddo avuttākārānampi saṅgāhako daṭṭhabbo. Tena utubhāvanānimittādīnampi pariggaṇhanaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Tasminti tasmiṃ taruṇasamādhimhi.
“主人”是指拥有者,也就是靠饮食、报酬等来养活他的人,这是含义。“侍奉”是指让人进食,也就是提供食物。观察他喜欢并进食的方式之后,再为他端上——这样连接。这个人也是瑜伽行者。所谓“在证得的时刻,食物等行相”,是指在先前证得禅那的时刻,能成办事务的食物等相关行相。“取”就是把握、观察之后。每当所缘消失,就一次又一次地再次将心投入安止。
Bhattāranti sāminaṃ, bhattavetanādīhi posakanti attho. Parivisantoti bhojento. Tassa ruccitvā bhuñjanākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tassa upanāmentoti yojanā. Ayampi yogī. Adhigatakkhaṇe bhojanādayo ākāreti pubbe jhānassa adhigatakkhaṇe kiccasādhake bhojanādigate ākāre. Gahetvāti pariggahetvā sallakkhetvā. Naṭṭhe naṭṭhe samādhimhi punappunaṃ appanāya.
因反复熟悉厨房技艺而成为智者。其中,因为智慧清晰明净,所以称为“通达”。因为具备当场生起的善巧,所以称为“善巧”。“种种差别”就是种种不同、种种自性,意思是种种味道。因此说“以酸分”等话。“以汤菜”就是指配菜。“以酸分”指以酸的部分,或者那些成为酸味中最上等的,即以四种酸等混合而成的。“苦分”等也是同样的道理。“以茄子、竹笋等混合而成的”指以茄子、竹笋等混合而成的。“相”指方式,即按欢喜而食的方式。“取”就是反复地取、反复地观察。或者,为了这份汤菜而把手伸出去。“供养”指应当当面送上的礼物,或者指供养的献奉。“取相”就是“我的心是这样得定的”,如此取相、观察。
Mahānasavijjāparicayena paṇḍito. Tattha visadañāṇatāya byatto. Ṭhānuppattikakaosallayogena kusalo. Nānaccayehīti nānaccayehi nānāsabhāvehi, nānārasehīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ambilaggehī’’tiādi. Sūpehīti byañjanehi. Ambilaggehīti ambilakoṭṭhāsehi, ye vā ambilarasā hutvā aggabhūtā, tehi caturambilādimissehi. Esa nayo tittakaggādīsupi. Khārikehīti vātiṅgaṇakaḷīrādimissehi. Nimittanti ākāraṃ ruccanavasena bhuñjanākāraṃ. Uggaṇhātīti uparūpari gaṇhāti upadhāreti. Imassa vā sūpeyyassa atthāya hatthaṃ abhiharati. Abhihārānanti abhimukhena haritabbānaṃ paṇṇākārānaṃ, pūjābhihārānaṃ vā. Nimittaṃ uggaṇhātīti ‘‘evaṃ me cittaṃ samāhitaṃ ahosī’’ti nimittaṃ gaṇhāti sallakkheti.
“定的障碍”是指那些成为定之障碍的法。“法”是指欲贪等盖障法。“由于善清净”是说极其清净,也就是仅靠镇伏便完全断除,这是它的意思。通过观察欲的过患等——“等”字包含了不净作意、观察出离的功德等。因为见到出离的功德,作为其系缚的欲贪的过患就特别明显。“身粗重”是指身体的躁动、身体的亢奋。这是说,作为身心躁动之因的嗔恚盖障并没有被清净。“勤界作意等”——通过“等”字,应当知道包含了精进觉支的因、光明想等。“奢摩他相作意等”——通过“等”字,应当知道包含了作为定觉支所依之法。其他定的障碍,是指疑所依之法、骄与慢等。“窟”是指居住的洞穴。“善清净”是指因为没有可被怀疑之处而彻底清净。这里有人问:这人先前已经观察了欲的过患而修习奢摩他行道,在近行刹那就已经用禅那镇伏了诸盖,那为什么还要再次取观察欲的过患等呢?确实如此。但那只是断除而已;为了让禅那长久安住、为了更殊胜地断除,所以再次取用。
Samādhiparipanthānanti samādhissa paripanthabhūtānaṃ. Dhammānanti kāmacchandādinīvaraṇadhammānaṃ. Suvisodhitattāti suṭṭhu visodhitattā, vikkhambhanavaseneva sammadeva pahīnattāti attho. Kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhīti ādi-saddena asubhamanasikāranekkhammānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Nekkhammaguṇadassanenāpi hi tassa vibandhabhūte kāmacchande ādīnavo visesato pākaṭo hotīti. Kāyaduṭṭhullanti kāyadarathaṃ sāraddhakāyataṃ. Tena kāyacittānaṃ sārambhanimittassa byāpādanīvaraṇassa na visodhanamāha. Ārambhadhātumanasikārādīti ādi-saddena vīriyasambojjhaṅganimittānaṃ, ālokasaññādīnañca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Samathanimittamanasikārādīti ādi-saddena samādhisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyānaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Aññepi samādhiparipantheti vicikicchāṭṭhāniye, madamānādike ca sandhāyāha. Āsayanti vasanakasusiraṃ. Suparisuddhanti āsaṅkanīyattābhāvena suṭṭhu parisuddhaṃ. Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ pageva kāmādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā samathapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno upacārakkhaṇeyeva jhānena nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāni, atha kasmā puna kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādi gahitanti? Saccametaṃ. Taṃ pana pahānamattanti jhānassa ciraṭṭhitiyā atisayapahānatthaṃ puna gahitaṃ.
“掉举与昏沉”这里指的是追悔和昏沉,因为把它们归在同一个组合里,所以就这样一起说了。“已至纯净”是指到了极其清净的尽头,在一切方面都清净、连角落都净化无余的园林。“在那里喜乐”,是说要在那禅那中喜乐,甚至整个白天都能安住在具足禅那的状态中。
Uddhaccamiddhanti kukkuccaṃ, thinañca tadekaṭṭhatāya gahitamevāti katvā vuttaṃ. Suddhantagatoti suparisuddhapariyantaṃ sabbaso visodhitakoṇapariyantaṃ uyyānaṃ gato. Tahiṃ rameti tasmiṃ jhāne rameyya divasabhāgampi jhānasamaṅgī eva bhaveyya.
心修习的广大,即定修习的广大。就像通过修习让相生起那样,同样,也是通过修习让它增长。所以,以一指等方式增长相的人,通过一再反复地修习,禅那的修习也会达到增长、壮大、广大。因此说“为了心修习的广大,应当增长如所获得的似相”。其中的“它”,指的是似相。
Cittabhāvanāvepullatthanti samādhibhāvanāya vipulabhāvāya. Yathā hi bhāvanāvasena nimittassa uppatti, evamassa bhāvanāvaseneva vaḍḍhanampi. Tasmā ekaṅgulādivasena nimittaṃ vaḍḍhentassa punappunaṃ bahulīkārena jhānaṃ bhāvanāpi vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittabhāvanāvepullatthañca yathāladdhaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ vaḍḍhetabba’’nti. Tassāti paṭibhāganimittassa.
增长似相的方法注释
Nimittavaḍḍhananayavaṇṇanā
77这里“于此”是表示所属关系的处格,意思是“它的”。“不增长”是指:就像陶工用泥土做钵时,先不划定界限就把钵做大;同样,以把钵做大的方式、以把钵做大的相应方法而不增长,即饼师把饼做大。在饭上面再添饭,就是饭的增长。把湿布拉伸等,就是布的增长。应当分别结合“方法”这个词。不应不划定界限就增长,因为修习只在有界限的范围内进行。正如所说:“于有限,非于无限。”
77.Tatrāti sāmiatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tassāti attho. Avaḍḍhetvāti yathā kumbhakāro mattikāya pattaṃ karonto paṭhamaṃ aparicchinditvāva pattaṃ vaḍḍheti, evaṃ pattavaḍḍhanayogena pattavaḍḍhanayuttiyā avaḍḍhetvā pūvikassa pūvavaḍḍhanaṃ. Bhattassa upari bhattapakkhipanaṃ bhattavaḍḍhanaṃ. Vatthassa tintassa añchanādi dussavaḍḍhanaṃ. Paccekaṃ yoga-saddo yojetabbo. Aparicchinditvā na vaḍḍhetabbaṃ saparicchede eva bhāvanāpavattito. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sāntake no anantake’’ti (visuddhi. 1.55).
“幼天鹅”是指动作敏捷的幼天鹅。“高岸”是指隆起的高处。“低岸”是指低洼的地方。被河水冲成的难行之处,叫“河险”。以凹凸不平的样子立着的山地,叫“山险”。
Haṃsapotakāti javanahaṃsapotakā. Ukkūlaṃ unnataṭṭhānaṃ. Vikūlaṃ ninnaṭṭhānaṃ. Nadīsotena kataṃ viduggaṃ nadīviduggaṃ. Visamākārena ṭhito pabbatapadeso pabbatavisamo.
它们变得粗大而现起,是因为观察太多,所以变得明显。它们变得微弱而现起,是因为熟练而有力的状态没有被再次引发。“向上精勤”是指在修习上向上攀登,也就是为了证得第二禅。
Thūlāni hutvā upaṭṭhahanti paccavekkhaṇābāhullena vibhūtabhāvato. Dubbalāni hutvā upaṭṭhahanti paguṇabalavabhāvassa anāpādikattā. Upari ussukkanāyāti bhāvanāya upari ārohanāya, dutiyajjhānādhigamāyāti attho.
“住在山里的”是指经常在山中活动。“不知田”是指不知道适合活动的范围。因为不知道定障的净化,所以是愚人。因为不具备让禅那变得熟练的能力,所以是不熟练的人。因为不了解更高禅那的立足基础,所以是不知田的人。因为在一切方面都不具备等至的善巧,所以是不善巧的人。或者,因为不反复亲近定的相,所以是愚人;因为不修习,所以是不熟练的人;因为不多修,所以是不知田的人;因为没有正确决意,所以是不善巧的人——应当这样配合理解。“两边都掉了”是指从两种禅那都退失了。他因为不熟练、没有稳稳安住,即使努力精进,也会由于被破坏和无能而从两种禅那中退失。“惯行而住的人”是指以反复亲近而获得自在的人。
Pabbateyyāti pabbate bahulacārinī. Akhettaññūti agocaraññū. Samādhiparipanthānaṃ visodhanānabhiññātāya bālo. Jhānassa paguṇabhāvāpādanaveyyattiyassa abhāvena abyatto. Uparijhānassa padaṭṭhānabhāvānavabodhena akhettaññū. Sabbathāpi samāpattikosallābhāvena akusalo. Samādhinimittassa vā anāsevanāya bālo. Abhāvanāya abyatto. Abahulīkārena akhettaññū. Sammadeva anadhiṭṭhānato akusaloti yojetabbaṃ. Ubhato bhaṭṭhoti ubhayato jhānato bhaṭṭho. So hi appaguṇatāya na suppatiṭṭhitatāya saussāhopi vināsato, asāmatthiyato ca jhānadvayato parihīno. Ciṇṇavasināti āsevitavasinā.
五自在论的注释
Pañcavasīkathāvaṇṇanā
7878. “住”就是“自在”,因为这是对界的解释,也就是对作用的解释,所以以这个意思说“自在者”,意思是随自己的喜好而转起。在转向方面自在,或者通过转向而自在,就是转向自在。对于禅那,想在什么地方转向就能在什么地方转向,这叫“于所欲之处”。无论什么时候,对哪个禅支有欲求,就能随欲求而转向,这叫“于所欲之时”。有多少欲求就能随多少欲求而转向,这叫“于所欲之量”,其中的“da”是连接词。“yāvā”这个词是就许多速行番像没有间隔一样地那样转起而说的,并不是只有一个,因为那只是一个被限定的心刹那。转向没有迟钝:按照所说的方式,无论在任何地方、任何时候,转向任何一个禅支,在想要的时间内,转向的生起都没有迟钝、没有拖延、没有迟缓。这样,就名为成就了转向自在。其余的是指出定自在、决意自在、观察自在。
78. Vasanaṃ vasīti dhātuniddesatāya kiriyāniddesoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vasiyo’’ti, yathāruci pavattiyoti attho. Āvajjanāya vasī, āvajjanāvasena vā vasī āvajjanavasī. Jhānaṃ āvajjituṃ yattha yattha padese icchā yatthicchakaṃ. Yadā yadā, yasmiṃ yasmiṃ vā jhānaṅge icchā yadicchakaṃ. Yāva yāva icchā yāvadicchakaṃ, da-kāro padasandhikaro. ‘‘Yāvā’’ti ca idaṃ bahūnaṃ javanavārānaṃ nirantaraṃ viya tathāpavattanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na ekameva. So hi paricchinnacittakkhaṇoti. Āvajjanāya dandhāyitattaṃ natthīti vuttanayena yattha katthaci ṭhāne yadā yadā yaṃ kiñci jhānaṅgaṃ āvajjentassa yathicchitaṃ kālaṃ āvajjanāya āvajjanappavattiyā dandhāyitattaṃ vitthāyitattaṃ, cirāyitattaṃ vā natthi. Evaṃ āvajjanavasī siddhā nāma hotīti attho. Sesāti vuṭṭhānaadhiṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇāvasiyo.
因为禅那是诸支的聚合,想要成就禅那转向自在的人,应当依次转向诸禅支,所以说“最初转向寻”。虽然这里所想要的只是转向,因为意在转向自在,但转向生起之后,必定要有速行。而那些速行,由于心转向的专注,以所转向的禅支为所缘,只生起少数几个,并不圆满,所以说“唯以寻为所缘的四或五个速行”。四个是利根者的,五个是非极利根者的,应当这样理解。“无间”是指没有异类心间隔。而此“有两个有分心间隔的四速行心”,就是前面所说的转向自在。其他如法将舍利弗尊者等人的转向自在也是如此。“于如是之时”是指一再起立、迅速成就转向自在之时。而此自在是短暂的、时间短促的,不像世尊的双神变那样长时相续,因此那被说为弟子们所不共的。与证得同时,与相应法俱起的禅那的正入、正行、正等至,即是禅那具足。
Aṅgasamudāyabhāvato jhānassa jhāne āvajjanavasiṃ nipphādetukāmena paṭipāṭiyā jhānaṅgāni āvajjetabbānīti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ vitakkaṃ āvajjayato’’ti. Yadipi āvajjanamevettha icchitaṃ āvajjanavasiyā adhippetattā, āvajjanāya pana uppannāya javanehi bhavitabbaṃ. Tāni ca kho āvajjanatapparatāya cittābhinīhārassa yathāvajjitajhānaṅgārammaṇāni katipayāneva honti, na paripuṇṇānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca vā javanāni javantī’’ti. Cattāri tikkhindriyassa. Pañca nātitikkhindriyassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirantaranti visabhāgehi nirantaraṃ. Ayaṃ panāti bhavaṅgadvayantaritā catujavanacittā yathāvuttā āvajjanavasī. Aññesaṃ vā dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ. Evarūpe kāleti uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya lahutaraṃ āvajjanavasīnibbattanakāle. Sā ca kho ittarā parittakālā, na satthu yamakamahāpāṭihāriye viya ciratarappabandhavatī. Tathā hi taṃ sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhigamena samaṃ sasampayuttassa jhānassa sammā āpajjanaṃ paṭipajjanaṃ samāpajjanaṃ, jhānasamaṅgitā.
这里说的“迅速”,是指想入定之后,生起两个有分心,随即截断有分,紧接着生起转向心,然后立刻入定——这种能快速入定的能力。而这种达到顶点的入定自在,只有在世尊说法时才能看到。关于这一点,经中这样说:“火种,我就在那番话结束时,把心安定在先前那个定相上,让心向内安住、平静下来、收摄为一、专注不动,因此就能一直安住其中。”比这更快的入定自在,实在没有了。月明之夜,刚剃完发的具寿舍利弗住在鸽窟,有个能击碎大山的夜叉朝他头上打了一下,这时他的入定也应该拿来作例子。正如后面会说的:“那时长老在被击打的同时就入了定。”不过圣典里说的是“入了某一种定之后坐着”。但这些长老说:“他出定的时间和那一击是同时的。”
Sīghanti ettha samāpajjitukāmatānantaraṃ dvīsu bhavaṅgesu uppannesu bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ samāpajjanaṃ sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā. Ayañca matthakappattā samāpajjanavasī satthu dhammadesanāyaṃ labbhati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, aggivessana, tassā eva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi yenassudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387). Ito sīghatarā hi samāpajjanavasī nāma natthi. Juṇhāya rattiyā navoropitehi kesehi kapotakandarāyaṃ viharantassa āyasmato sāriputtassa yakkhena mahantampi pabbatakūṭaṃ padāletuṃ samatthe pahāre sīse dinne samāpajjanampettha nidassetabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘tadā thero tassa paharaṇasamaye samāpattiṃ appesī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.374). Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘aññataraṃ samādhiṃ samāpajjitvā nisinno’’ti (udā. 34) vuttaṃ. Ime pana therā ‘‘samāpattito vuṭṭhānasamakālaṃ tena pahāro dinno’’ti vadanti.
“弹指顷”是指弹一下手指那么短的一刹那。“置”是指有能力像用堤坝挡住急流一样,不让禅那随着迅猛的流势冲走,而能在所说的那个刹那把禅那安住下来。以压倒性的力量安住,或者说像决意那样,所以叫决意;在这方面得自在,就是决意自在。“同样地,迅速地出定”,是指具备禅那的人,能在弹指顷或十弹指顷这样短的一刹那,从禅那中出定的能力。在这里,有分心的生起就是从禅那出定。应当知道:就像有人依靠之前的加行力量,能够决意“我就只在这个刹那安住禅那”,这是决意自在;同样,依靠之前的加行力量,能够决意“我就只在这个刹那具备禅那,然后从禅那出定”,这是出定自在,这被称为“出定善巧”。之所以要显示这两者,就是为了显示决意自在和出定自在。
Accharāmattanti aṅguliphoṭamattaṃ khaṇaṃ. Ṭhapetunti setu viya sīghasotāya nadiyā oghaṃ vegena pavattituṃ adatvā yathāvuttakkhaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā. Abhibhuyya ṭhapanaṃ, adhiṭṭhānaṃ viyāti vā adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha vasī adhiṭṭhānavasī. Tatheva lahuṃ vuṭṭhātunti accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā lahuṃ khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthatā. Bhavaṅgacittuppattiyeva hettha jhānato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena adhiṭṭhānasamatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī, evaṃ ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena vuṭṭhānasamatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī veditabbā, yā samāpatti ‘‘vuṭṭhānakusalatā’’ti vuccati. Tadubhayadassanatthanti adhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānavasīdassanatthaṃ.
这里说的“那里”,是指在那座化现出来的山上、那个山洞里。虽然化现那座山的神通心是同一个,但这里应当理解为:这是在显示作为神通基础的禅那能够非常迅速地安住和出定。“这么多有神通的人,竟然连一个侍者都没能从金翅鸟那里保护下来”——我们该受到责备。
Tatthāti tasmiṃ nimmitapabbate tassa vivare. Kiñcāpi ekaṃyeva taṃ abhiññācittaṃ yena pabbataṃ nimmineyya, abhiññāpādakassa pana jhānassa lahutaraṃ ṭhapanaṃ, vuṭṭhānañca idha nidassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ettakā iddhimantā ekaṃ upaṭṭhākaṃ garuḷato rakkhituṃ na sakkhiṃsū’’ti gārayhā assāma.
所谓“转向之后”,是指为了成就转向的自在,依次对寻等诸禅支进行转向之后,随后生起的那些速行心,就是对它们的观察。应当知道,从转向自在成就的那一刻起,观察自在也就成就了。
Āvajjanānantarānīti āvajjanavasībhāvāya yathākkamaṃ vitakkādīnaṃ jhānaṅgānaṃ āvajjanāya parato yāni javanāni pavattāni, tāni tesaṃ paccavekkhaṇāni. Yadaggena āvajjanavasīsiddhi, tadaggena paccavekkhaṇāvasīsiddhi veditabbā.
第二禅的讨论注释
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
7979. 因为断除诸盖是初禅的首要条件,所以诸盖是初禅的近敌。“粗”是指虽然广大,却像边材一样容易破碎,所以说“因粗重故,支分弱”。作意“寂静”:因为不像初禅那样有粗重的支分,并且具足寂静之法,所以作意“寂静”。第二禅中的喜、乐等法,初禅中虽然也有,但与初禅相比,这些法更为寂静、更为殊胜。“喜着”指渴望,是期望的意思。“遍取”指灭尽。“四或五”中的“或”字,是省略的说法。证得第二禅者,即第二禅人。如前所述,是指如初禅中曾说过的种类,即遍作等名称的意义。
79. Nīvaraṇappahānassa tappaṭhamatāya āsannanīvaraṇapaccatthikā. Thūlaṃ nāma vipulampi pheggu viya sukhabhañjanīyanti āha ‘‘oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā’’ti. Santato manasi karitvāti paṭhamajjhānaṃ viya anoḷārikaṅgattā, santadhammasamaṅgitāya ca ‘‘santa’’nti manasi katvā. Ye hi dhammā dutiyajjhāne pītisukhādayo, kāmaṃ te paṭhamajjhānepi santi, tehi pana te santatarā ceva paṇītatarā ca bhavantīti. Nikantinti nikāmanaṃ, apekkhanti attho. Pariyādāyāti khepetvā. Cattāri pañcāti vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānaṃ etassa atthīti dutiyajjhānikaṃ. Vuttappakārānevāti paṭhamajjhāne vuttappakārāniyeva, parikammādināmakānīti attho.
80“止息”是指止息的因由。这里所说的止息,指的是断除,而且是指寻与伺的断除。“超越”从意义上说,就是在第二禅的刹那不再生起,所以说“由于超越”等等。那么,这里所说的寻与伺的止息,到底是指初禅的寻与伺,还是指第二禅的寻与伺呢?如果说是初禅的,那它们并没有被止息,因为初禅任何时候都不可能没有寻与伺。如果说是第二禅的,那也同样没有被止息,因为它们在第二禅中完全不存在。回答是:正是因为超越了那些使初禅变得粗重的寻与伺,才证得第二禅,而不是因为超越了在自性上并不粗重的触等法,这个意思就是由“寻与伺的止息”这句话所显示的。因此,像“这里所说的止息,到底是初禅的寻与伺的止息,还是第二禅的”这样的责难,根本没有成立的余地。因为,所谓止息,是指让那些已经见过过患的法,在各自对应的禅那刹那中不再生起。作为禅支的寻等本身被这样处理,而不是与它们相应的触等法,所以只对寻等说止息等,是合乎道理的。然而,在经典中,对于寻等以及与之相应的诸法,也同样以“这是粗重的”等方式显示了过患。因此,在应当不加区分地说寻等及其俱行法的止息等时,却只说寻的止息,这多出来的说法能使人了知另一种含义,所以说它显示某种差别。为了说明这一点,义注中采用了“然而,粗重的……”等等;这里所说的“由于那些寻与伺”等等,应当如此理解。在“由于离喜”等等之中,也是同样的道理。因此,超越寻、伺、喜、乐的说法,是显示超越粗粗的禅支而证得第二禅等,所以其中作为一部分的超越寻与伺的说法,被说成是显示那一点的。因为即使分别安立超越寻与伺的说法等,由于与应断支的说明有共通之处,当以心整体地把握时,寻与伺止息的说法应视为其中的一部分。这个意思是以部分来标示整体的方式说的。或者,由寻与伺止息的说法本身,即由显示超越它们而证得第二禅的说法,也就显示了离喜等说法是显示超越喜等而证得第三禅等,因此说它显示了那一点。
80.Vūpasamāti vūpasamahetu, vūpasamoti cettha pahānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tañca vitakkavicārānaṃ. Atikkamo atthato dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe anuppādoti āha ‘‘samatikkamā’’tiādi. Katamesaṃ panettha vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo adhippeto, kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, udāhu dutiyajjhānikānanti. Kiñcettha yadi paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, natthi tesaṃ vūpasamo. Na hi kadāci paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārarahitaṃ atthi. Atha dutiyajjhānikānaṃ, evampi nattheva vūpasamo, sabbena sabbaṃ tesaṃ tattha abhāvatoti? Vuccate – yehi vitakkavicārehi paṭhamajjhānassa oḷārikatā, tesaṃ samatikkamā dutiyassa jhānassa samadhigamo, na sabhāvato anoḷārikānaṃ phassādīnaṃ samatikkamāti ayamattho ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etena dīpito. Tasmā ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo idhādhippeto, udāhu dutiyajjhānikāna’’nti edisī codanā anokāsāva. Yasmā diṭṭhādīnavassa taṃtaṃjhānakkhaṇe anuppattidhammatāpādanaṃ vūpasamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vitakkādayo eva jhānaṅgabhūtā tathā karīyanti, na taṃsampayuttā phassādayo, tasmā vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamādivacanaṃ ñāyāgataṃ. Yasmā pana vitakkādīnaṃ viya taṃsampayuttadhammānampi etena ‘‘etaṃ oḷārika’’nti ādīnavadassanaṃ sutte āgataṃ, tasmā avisesena vitakkādīnaṃ, taṃsahagatānañca vūpasamādike vattabbe vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamo vuccamāno adhikavacanaṃ aññaṃ atthaṃ bodhetīti katvā kiñci visesaṃ dīpetīti dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘oḷārikassa panā’’tiādi gahitanti idha ‘‘yehi vitakkavicārehī’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Pītiyā ca virāgā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tasmā vitakkavicārapītisukhasamatikkamavacanāni oḷārikoḷārikaṅgasamatikkamā dutiyādiadhigamadīpakānīti tesaṃ ekadesabhūtaṃ vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanaṃ taṃdīpakaṃ vuttaṃ. Visuṃ visuṃ ṭhitepi hi vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanādike paheyyaṅganiddesatāsāmaññena cittena samūhato gahite vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanassa tadekadesatā daṭṭhabbā. Ayañca attho avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇanayena vutto. Atha vā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva taṃsamatikkamā dutiyādhigamadīpakena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ pītiādisamatikkamā tatiyādiadhigamadīpakatā dīpitā hotīti tassa taṃdīpakatā vuttā.
这里所说的“自己的内在”是指内在本身,而不是指“内在的内在”等等。对此,论师说出理由:“然而在《分别论》中……”等等。就像因为与蓝色相连,布才被称为蓝布,意思是:因为与蓝色相连,布就成了蓝色的。同样,因为与那种净信相连,禅那才成为净信的禅那。说明了这一点之后,通过“净信的禅那”这种同位语的表述,就表明了:由于与净信相连,那个词被用在禅那上,因此并不矛盾,这是合理的。那么,“成为一境”又怎么讲呢?如果显示了“一境”,通过“成为一境的禅那”这种同位语的表述,是否就说明了禅那具有使一境增长的性质呢?如果把“成为一境”这个词单独抽出来,就不应该对“一境”另作解说,因此“成为一境”这个词本身,就像“净信”这个词用在定上一样,是用在禅那上的,这是合理的。在这个义理抉择中,在“令心净信”这一主张里,“心的”是表示宾格意义的所有格。在前一个主张,即“因为与净信相连,禅那成为净信的”当中,“心的”在关联关系中是所有格。
Niyakajjhattamadhippetaṃ na ajjhattajjhattādi. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘vibhaṅge panā’’tiādi. Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viyāti nīlayogato vatthaṃ nīlaṃ viyāti adhippāyo. Yena sampasādanena yogā jhānaṃ sampasādanaṃ. Tasmiṃ dassite ‘‘sampasādanaṃ jhāna’’nti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva taṃyogā jhāne taṃsaddappavatti dassitāti avirodho yutto. Ekodibhāve kathanti ekodimhi dassite ekodibhāvaṃ jhānanti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva jhānassa ekodivaḍḍhanatā vuttā hotīti ce? ‘‘Ekodibhāva’’nti padaṃ uddharitvā ekodissa niddeso na kātabbo siyāti ekodibhāvasaddo eva samādhimhi pavatto sampasādanasaddo viya jhāne pavattatīti yuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappeti ‘‘cetaso sampasādayatī’’ti etasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘cetaso’’ti ca upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Purimasminti ‘‘sampasādanayogato jhānaṃ sampasādana’’nti vuttapakkhe. Cetasoti sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.
世间最殊胜的人也被称为“一”,比如在“只要其他人……我就独自为你做……”这类说法里。而在“被独一的、微小者所征服”这类说法里,“一”这个词也含有“没有同伴”的意思,所以注释者说“成为独一、没有同伴”。信等法虽然确实以共通的、不共通的方式作为相应法的缘,但定在禅那的刹那,以不散乱为特相、执行根的作用,成为相应法特别殊胜的缘。为了说明这一点,就说“对相应法……增语”。
Seṭṭhopi loke ‘‘eko’’ti vuccati ‘‘yāva pare ekāhaṃ te karomī’’tiādīsu. Eko adutiyo ‘‘ekākībhi khuddakehi jita’’ntiādīsu asahāyatthopi eka-saddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘eko asahāyo hutvā’’ti. Saddhādayopi kāmaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ sādhāraṇato, asādhāraṇato ca paccayā hontiyeva, samādhi pana jhānakkhaṇe sampayuttadhammānaṃ avikkhepalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhakaraṇena sātisayaṃ paccayo hotīti dassento ‘‘sampayuttadhamme…pe… adhivacana’’nti āha.
“净信”和“心一境性”这两个定语,是为了表达禅那的殊胜而采用的。为了说明这种殊胜只在这样的禅那中才能得到,而在初禅中并非如此,所以说了“难道不是……”等话。由于寻和伺对所缘的撞击与反复撞击,以及随后的伺察与反复审察,这些法虽然在断除五盖、烦恼污浊消除之后生起,却仿佛对相应法造成某种搅动,而那些相应法也未能与它们妥善安住,因此说“因寻与伺的搅动而不极清净”。小浪叫涟漪,大浪叫波涛。即使诸根平衡、精进平等,由于那种搅动,以及没有净信,定也不够明显,就像浑浊水中的鱼。所说的那种搅动本身就是障碍。如此,依据那种信而说禅那为“净信”,依据那种心一境性而说为“心一境性”。通过以“信解”等方式说明其生起行相的差别,以及那段《分别论》的文句——“因为与净信相应,或者因为有净信,所以叫净信;令心成为一境而修习,所以叫心一境性——禅那被这样说。”这样展开的义释并不矛盾。至于为什么不矛盾,前面已经说过了。
‘‘Sampasādanaṃ , cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti visesanadvayaṃ jhānassa atisayavacanicchāvasena gahitaṃ. Svāyamatisayo yathā imasmiṃ jhāne labbhati, na tathā paṭhamajjhāneti imaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇe āhananapariyāhananavasena, anumajjanaanuyojanavasena ca pavattamānā dhammā satipi nīvaraṇappahānena kilesakālussiyāpagame sampayuttānaṃ kañci khobhaṃ karontā viya tehi ca te na sannisinnā hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārakkhobhena na suppasanna’’nti. Khuddikā ūmiyo vīciyo. Mahatiyo taraṅgā. Satipi indriyasamatte, vīriyasamatāya ca teneva khobhena, sampasādābhāvena ca samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo bahale viya jale maccho. Yathāvuttakkhobho eva palibodho. Evaṃ vuttenāti yassā saddhāya vasena sampasādanaṃ, yassā ca cittekaggatāya vasena ekodibhāvanti ca jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tāsaṃ eva ‘‘saddahanā’’tiādinā pavattiākārassa visesavibhāvanāvasena vuttena. Tena vibhaṅgapāṭhena. ‘‘Sampasādanayogato, sampasādanato vā sampasādanaṃ, ekodiṃ bhāvetīti ekodibhāvanti jhānaṃ vutta’’nti evaṃ pavattā ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanā na virujjhati. Yathā pana avirodho, so vutto eva.
81已寂静:已平等地进入寂灭。已平息:通过修习而平等地达到寂灭、被灭尽。已善寂静:正是由此而彻底寂静。已消逝:已走向灭尽、坏灭。已完全消逝:加上前缀来扩展词义而说的。已投入:已走向灭尽。已干涸:因为被称为流转的相续不存在,所以达到干涸、枯竭的状态。已尽除:已使其边际灭尽。
81.Santāti samaṃ nirodhaṃ gatā. Samitāti bhāvanāya samaṃ gamitā nirodhitā. Vūpasantāti tato eva suṭṭhu upasantā. Atthaṅgatāti atthaṃ vināsaṃ gatā. Abbhatthaṅgatāti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Appitāti vināsaṃ gamitā. Sositāti pavattisaṅkhātassa santānassa abhāvena sosaṃ sukkhabhāvaṃ itā. Byantikatāti vigatantakatā.
这个意思是:因为通过修习已经断除,所以寻和伺不存在。接受了质问者所说的意思之后,为了遮遣,先说了“确实如此,这个意思已经成立”,然后才说“然而并非此”等等。其中,“此”指的是“寻与伺的寂止”这句话。“能显示那个意思”:能显示那被称为“仅仅是没有寻和伺”的意思。这里的意思是这样的:既然通过显示证得第二禅等的方便、以内心清净和心一境性作为显示之因、又以显示无寻无伺之因的寻伺寂止这句话,就已经显示了无寻无伺,那再说“无寻无伺”又有什么用呢?并非如此,因为还没有被显示出来。因为寻伺寂止这句话并没有说明寻和伺的不生起。对寻和伺的渴爱被断除,才是它们的寂止;然而,在那些对诸行断除渴爱的道中,以及在已断除渴爱的果中,诸行确实仍然在生起。同样地,在这里,对于以镇伏方式断除寻伺渴爱的第二禅,它与寻伺的相应可能没有被前句阻止,为了阻止它,并且为了显示超越想要转向等才是它们的寂止,所以说了“无寻无伺”。所谓“第一禅也是如此”,即第一禅也如此。
Ayamatthoti bhāvanāya pahīnattā vitakkavicārānaṃ abhāvo. Codakena vuttamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pariharituṃ ‘‘evametaṃ siddhovāyamattho’’ti vatvā ‘‘na paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha etanti ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Tadatthadīpakanti tassa vitakkavicārābhāvamattasaṅkhātassa atthassa dīpakaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – dutiyajjhānādiadhigamūpāyadīpakena ajjhattasampasādanatāya, cetaso ekodibhāvatāya ca hetudīpakena, avitakkaavicārabhāvahetudīpakena ca vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva vitakkavicārābhāvo dīpitoti kiṃ puna avitakkaavicāravacanena katenāti? Na, adīpitattā. Na hi vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena vitakkavicārānaṃ appavatti vuttā hoti. Vitakkavicāresu hi taṇhāppahānaṃ etesaṃ vūpasamanaṃ, ye ca saṅkhāresu taṇhāppahānaṃ karonti, tesu maggesu, pahīnataṇhesu ca phalesu saṅkhārapavatti hoti eva , evamevidhāpi vikkhambhitavitakkavicārataṇhassa dutiyajjhānassa vitakkavicārasampayogo purimena na nivārito siyāti taṃnivāraṇatthaṃ, āvajjitukāmatādiatikkamova tesaṃ vūpasamoti dassanatthañca ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamampīti paṭhamaṃ jhānampi.
说“第二禅是已生起的,所以叫第二”,这样讲是可以的。但这里的寻与伺,并不像初禅近行刹那断除诸盖那样,在第二禅的近行刹那被断除,因为它们的本性并非杂染,而且近行修习也没有能力断除它们。即使通过那种近行修习能断除对它们的渴爱,那也不是殊胜的断除。因为在那里,殊胜的渴爱断除只在安止中才有。所以才说“只在安止刹那”等。即使说到“断除支”,也应当理解为是依殊胜的断除而说,就像诸盖对于初禅那样。因此,因为此禅只有三支,所以这样说。彼,是指《分别论》中的话。就像车上的黄毛毯是车的装饰,不是车的组成部分一样,净信是禅的资具,不是禅支,所以说“为了显示带资具的禅”。
‘‘Dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiya’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Na tathā imassa vitakkavicārāti yathā paṭhamajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇāni pahīyanti, tathā imassa dutiyajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇe vitakkavicārā na pahīyanti asaṃkiliṭṭhasabhāvattā, upacārabhāvanāya ca te pahātuṃ asamatthabhāvato. Yadipi tāya tesu taṇhā pahīyati, na pana savisesaṃ. Savisesañhi tattha taṇhāppahānaṃ appanāya eva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘appanākkhaṇeyevā’’tiādi. Pahānaṅgatāpi atisayappahānavaseneva veditabbā yathā nīvaraṇānaṃ paṭhamajjhānassa. Tasmāti yasmā tivaṅgamevetaṃ jhānaṃ, tasmā. Tanti vibhaṅge vacanaṃ. Rathassa paṇḍukambalaṃ viya sampasādo jhānassa parikkhāro, na jhānaṅganti āha ‘‘saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetu’’nti.
第三禅的注释
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
82“踊跃”这个词,说的是一个人还没有放下对执取对象的爱恋、没有看到其中的过患时,与渴爱相伴的喜生起的状态;但在这里,指的是第二禅的喜。即便如此,因为对喜完全没有离染,那喜也会跟着来,所以才这样说。或者说,“踊跃”就是“像踊跃的样子”。应当知道,这是为了让过患在那里显得更加明显才这样说的。
82.Uppilāvitanti kāmañcāyaṃ pariggahesu apariccattapemassa anādīnavadassino taṇhāsahagatāya pītiyā pavattiākāro, idha pana dutiyajjhānapīti adhippetā. Tathāpi sabbaso pītiyaṃ avirattaṃ, sāpi anubandheyyāti vuttaṃ. Uppilāvitaṃ viyāti vā uppilāvitaṃ. Ādīnavaṃ hi tattha pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
83离染就是离贪。不过,为了说明这离染要么是通过厌离的方式而厌弃,要么是断除与喜相关联的贪,这两种情况,所以说“对前述那样的喜,或是厌弃,或是超越”。“前述那样的”,就是指“凡在那里有喜”等所说的那种。“总集”就是合聚。
83. Virajjanaṃ virāgo. Taṃ pana virajjanaṃ nibbindanamukhena hīḷanaṃ vā tappaṭibaddharāgappahānaṃ vāti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā’’ti āha. Vuttappakārāyāti ‘‘yadeva tattha pītī’’tiādinā vuttappakārāya. Sampiṇḍanaṃ samuccayo.
“道”就是方法。为了证得它,意思是为了证得第三道。
Maggoti upāyo. Tadadhigamāyāti tatiyamaggādhigamāya.
8484. “生起”是指以平等安住的状态、如理地生起。禅那舍也是把平等安住内在纳入之后才运作的,所以说“平等地看待”。“明净”是指因远离杂染而清澈明净。“广大”是指广大,达到了极其广大的状态。“坚固”是指因喜的消失而达到稳固的状态。
84.Upapattitoti samavāhitabhāvena patirūpato. Jhānupekkhāpi samavāhitameva antonītaṃ katvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘samaṃ passatī’’ti. Visadāyāti paribyattāya saṃkilesavigamena. Vipulāyāti mahatiyā sātisayaṃ mahaggatabhāvappattiyā. Thāmagatāyāti pītivigamena thirabhāvappattāya.
本性清净,就是漏尽者的本性,也就是远离一切烦恼的状态。梵住舍,是以看见众生各自承受自己业果的见解为因,而生起平等看待众生的方式,也就是中舍的心态。
Parisuddhapakati khīṇāsavapakati nikkilesatā. Sattesu kammassakatādassanahetuko samabhāvadassanākāro majjhattākāro brahmavihārupekkhā.
对于“俱生法”这一表述,这是在论释中的属格用法。觉支舍是指:在平等而持续运转的修习过程中,当修行进入行路阶段时,由于不粘著、不兴奋、不耽味,在策励、抑制、随喜这些方面都不起作用,因此成为对相应诸法的中舍状态。
Sahajātadhammānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Samappavattiyā bhāvanāya vīthipaṭipannāya alīnānuddhatā nirassādatāya paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu byāpārābhāvato sampayuttadhammesu majjhattākārabhūtā bojjhaṅgupekkhā.
这里说的“舍相”,是指远离昏沉和掉举两边、不堕两边而处于中道的精进,这就是舍。正是那种精进,取这样的状态而运作,因为它成为应当依那样的状态而生起的精进的“相”,所以叫“舍相”。在修习平等运转的时候,这种精进被以舍观之,所以叫“舍”;精进本身就是舍,这就是“精进舍”。
Upekkhānimittanti ettha līnuddhaccapakkhapātarahitaṃ majjhattaṃ vīriyaṃ upekkhā. Tadeva taṃ ākāraṃ gahetvā pavattetabbassa tādisassa vīriyassa nimittabhāvato upekkhānimittaṃ bhāvanāya samappavattikāle upekkhīyatīti upekkhā, vīriyameva upekkhā vīriyupekkhā.
“为了证得初禅,而对诸盖……乃至为了证得非想非非想处定,而对无所有处想加以审察、安住,这样的慧,就是行舍智。”(《无碍解道》1.57)像这样说的这八种,是依定而生起的。“为了证得入流道,而对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、产生、再生、出生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼……为了证得入流果等至……乃至为了证得阿拉汉道,而对生起……中略……恼……为了证得阿拉汉果等至,为了空住等至,为了无相住等至,而对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、产生、再生、出生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼加以审察、安住,这样的慧,就是行舍智。”像这样说的这十种,是依观而生起的。在这里,对由初禅等所镇伏的诸盖、寻、伺等加以审察,从自性上反复观察之后,以确定的方式安住,这就是“对诸盖等的审察安住”;由于已经见到它们的过患,所以对它们的执取和生起保持中舍的观慧,就是对执取保持平等的舍。
‘‘Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya nīvaraṇe…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ paṭilābhatthāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā imā aṭṭha samādhivasena uppajjanti. ‘‘Sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ. Sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ…pe… arahattamaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ…pe… upāyāsaṃ…pe… arahattaphalasamāpattatthāya suññatāvihārasamāpattatthāya animittavihārasamāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇa’’nti evamāgatā imā dasa vipassanāvasena uppajjanti. Ettha ca paṭhamajjhānādīhi vikkhambhitāni nīvaraṇavitakkavicārādīni paṭisaṅkhāya sabhāvato upaparikkhitvā sanniṭṭhānavasena tiṭṭhamānā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā diṭṭhādīnavattā tesaṃ gahaṇe uppādane ajjhupekkhantī vipassanāpaññā gahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā.
在这里,“生起”是指以过去业为缘,诸蕴在此处的产生。“转起”是指这样生起之后的持续运作。“相”是指一切三界行法,因为它们以相的方式呈现。“积集”是指作为未来结生之因的业。“结生”是指未来的产生。“趣”是指以哪种趣而结生。“产生”是指诸蕴的产生。“再生”是指在“等至者或再生者”(《无碍解道》1.72)这句话中,所说的“再生者”的异熟转起。“出生”是指作为老等之缘、由有缘而生的出生。老、病、死等则是显而易见的。在这里,生起等五种只是就行舍智的所缘范围而说,其余的是作为它们的同义词而说。应当知道:“产生”和“出生”这两个是“生起”和“结生”的同义词,“趣”和“再生”这两个是“转起”的同义词,老等则是“相”的同义词。依无愿解脱而为道生起之因的有四种,同样,为果等至之因的有四种,依空住和无相住而为因的有两种,这样一共是十种行舍。
Tattha uppādanti purimakammapaccayā khandhānaṃ idha uppattimāha. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavattiṃ. Nimittanti sabbampi tebhūmakasaṅkhāragataṃ nimittabhāvena upaṭṭhānato. Āyūhananti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhinti āyatiṃ uppattiṃ. Gatinti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattinti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattinti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.72) ettha ‘‘upapannassā’’ti vuttavipākappavattiṃ. Jātinti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ bhavapaccayā jātiṃ. Jarābyādhimaraṇādayo pākaṭā eva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇassa visayavasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbatti, jātī’’ti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati, upapatti cā’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti veditabbaṃ. Appaṇihitavimokkhavasena magguppattihetubhūtā catasso, tathā phalasamāpattiyā catasso, suññatavihāraanimittavihāravasena dveti dasa saṅkhārupekkhā.
“凡”即观慧。“凡存在的”,是指无常等三相可得于其中的(诸法)。“凡是已生的”,是指因为由缘所生而称为已生的五蕴。“他断除”,是指以无常随观等断除常想等;由于已经正确见到过患,所以通过断除与它相连的欲贪来断除,以致未来无执取,如此以修行而断除。处于这种状态的人,在那里获得舍。“简择”,是指依无常等行相进行思惟时,也(是如此)。
Yāti vipassanāpaññā. Yadatthīti yaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇattayaṃ upalabbhati. Yaṃ bhūtanti yaṃ paccayanibbattattā bhūtaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Taṃ pajahatīti aniccānupassanādīhi niccasaññādayo pajahanto sammadeva diṭṭhādīnavattā tappaṭibaddhacchandarāgappahānena pajahati, yathā āyatiṃ ādānaṃ na hoti, tathā paṭipattiyā pajahati. Tathābhūto ca tattha upekkhaṃ paṭilabhati. Vicinaneti aniccādivasena sammasanepi.
它是与它相应的那些法能够平等生起的原因,所以成了平等运载的状态。由于已经从盖、寻、伺等一切对立法中解脱出来,所以对一切对立法都清净无染。由于那些对立法已经止息,所以在对立法止息时也是无所作为的状态,是以无所作为的方式生起的,或者说已经达到了无所作为。
Sampayuttadhammānaṃ samappavattihetutāya samavāhitabhūtā. Nīvaraṇavitakkavicārādisabbapaccanīkehi vimuttattā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā. Tesaṃ vūpasantattā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā abyāpārabhāvena pavattā, abyāpārataṃ vā pattā.
如果从含义上说是一,那为什么会有这种差别呢?所以接着说“以彼彼”等等。所谓“因此”,是因为:虽然从自性上说并没有差别,但此舍由于种种不同的缘而有这些不同的状态;那些缘不能同时生起,所以它们并非没有差别,或者说并非同时生起。因此才说“于何处有六支舍”等等。
Yadi atthato ekā, kathamayaṃ bhedoti āha ‘‘tena tenā’’tiādi. Tasmāti yasmā satipi sabhāvato abhede yehi pana paccayavisesehi svāyamimāsaṃ avatthābhedo, tesaṃ ekajjhaṃ appavattito na tāsaṃ abhedo, ekajjhaṃ vā pavatti, tasmā. Tenāha ‘‘yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā’’tiādi.
“成为单一性”就是单一的状态。虽然它们在中舍性这一点上是共同的,但按照所缘的不同,它仍然有差别。为了详细说明“按作用分成两种”这句话所指的是什么,所以说了“正如”等话。这是观舍。关于这一点,经典中说:“凡是存在的、凡是已生的,他都舍断,获得舍。”(《中部》3.71;《增支部》7.55)其中,“凡是存在的、凡是已生的”指的是五蕴,他以想要解脱的智而舍断它。就像已见三者的遍持者在简择一切相时那样,已见三相的已生者在简择诸行相时,获得舍。由于对诸行的无常等相已经善加照见,所以在简择它们时,作为中舍状态的观舍便已成立;同样,对于已见过患的诸行,在执取它们时,中舍也自然成立,因为他的心已经完全倾向于无为。
Ekībhāvoti ekatā. Satipi majjhattābhāvasāmaññe visayabhedena panassā bhedo. Yamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55). Tattha yadatthi yaṃ bhūtanti khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇena pajahati. Diṭṭhasovattikattayassa sabbalakkhaṇavicinane viya diṭṭhalakkhaṇattayassa bhūtassa saṅkhāralakkhaṇavicinane upekkhaṃ paṭilabhati. Saṅkhārānaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇassa sudiṭṭhattā tesaṃ vicinane majjhattabhūtāya vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya tathā diṭṭhādīnavānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇepi ajjhupekkhanā siddhāva hoti, sabbaso visaṅkhāraninnattā ajjhāsayassa.
“无著味”是说,即使处在殊胜的快乐中,它也不偏向那快乐,这是它的对治作用。“无功用现起”是说,即使已经达到快乐的极致,它也不在那快乐上有所作为而现起;或者说,它使相应法在这方面无所作为而现起。由于被那些能给相应法带来动摇和涌动的寻等所制伏,所以它不明显。在那里是中舍性的作用。因为那些寻等不存在,所以在这里它就变得明显。
Anābhogarasāti paṇītasukhepi tasmiṃ avanatipaṭipakkhakiccāti attho. Abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānāti satipi sukhapāramippattiyaṃ tasmiṃ sukhe abyāvaṭā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, sampayuttānaṃ vā tattha abyāpāraṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti attho. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ khobhaṃ, uppilavañca āvahantehi vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā aparibyattaṃ. Tattha tatramajjhattatāya kiccaṃ. Tadabhāvato idha paribyattaṃ.
85“能忆念,所以是具念的人”,这句话说明这个词是按行为主体方式成立的。能正知,就是正确地了知。忆念、思惟、现起是它的特相,所以叫忆念相。不忘失是失念的对立面,那是它的作用,所以叫不忘失的作用。它作为对烦恼的守护而现起,或者由此建立起守护,所以叫守护现起。不迷乱就是正确地了知,或者说是痴的对立面,即不痴。简择是作用的完成。审察就是推度。
85.‘‘Saratīti sato’’ti padassa kattusādhanatamāha. Sampajānātīti sammadeva pajānāti. Saraṇaṃ cintanaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ lakkhaṇametissāti saraṇalakkhaṇā. Sammussanapaṭipakkho asammussanaṃ, taṃ kiccaṃ etissāti asammussanarasā. Kilesehi ārakkhā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, tato vā ārakkhaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammuyhanaṃ sammadeva pajānanaṃ, sammohapaṭipakkho vā asammoho. Tīraṇaṃ kiccassa pāragamanaṃ. Pavicayo vīmaṃsā.
当然,相对于近行定等来说,初禅和二禅也是微细的,但相对于更高的禅那,这里说它“粗”。这种粗应该理解为寻等粗重成分的存在。有些人说“因为心所众多”。意思是说,在那些禅那中,趣向是乐的。在那里,念与正知的作用不明显,因为没有什么可称为“这是难行的”之事。通过断除粗重支而变得微细,这个道理虽然在二禅也存在,但因为喜与乐大多数情况下不相分离,所以在这里,通过断除称为喜的粗重支而变得微细,因此这里的念与正知的作用更为殊胜,所以说“如人……”等。再次接近喜,意思是可能成为退分禅,也就是可能退回到二禅。所以说“可能成为与喜相应的”。说“这是极甜美之乐”,是指第三禅的乐。它的极甜美,应该理解为正是因为没有了那种以兴奋激动为本质的喜。这里的“此”,指“具念、正知”这两个词。
Kāmaṃ upacārajjhānādīni upādāya paṭhamadutiyajjhānānipi sukhumāneva, imaṃ pana uparijhānaṃ upādāya ‘‘oḷārikattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā ca oḷārikatā vitakkādithūlaṅgatāya veditabbā. Keci ‘‘bahucetasikatāyā’’ti ca vadanti . Gati sukhā hoti tattha jhānesūti adhippāyo. Abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ ‘‘idaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ karīyatī’’ti vattabbassa abhāvato. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena sukhumattāti ayamattho kāmaṃ dutiyajjhānepi sambhavati, tathāpi yebhuyyena avippayogībhāvena vattamānesu pītisukhesu pītisaṅkhātassa oḷārikaṅgassa pahānena sukhumatāya idha sātisayo satisampajaññabyāpāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘purisassā’’tiādi. Punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyyāti hānabhāgiyaṃ jhānaṃ siyā dutiyajjhānameva sampajjeyyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘pītisampayuttameva siyā’’ti. ‘‘Idañca atimadhuraṃ sukha’’nti tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ sandhāyāha. Atimadhuratā cassa pahāsodagyasabhāvāya pītiyā abhāveneva veditabbā. Idanti ‘‘sato, sampajāno’’ti padadvayaṃ.
因此,为了说明这个含义:那位具备禅那的人,会体验与名身相应的乐。或者,“那”是指前面所说的与名身相应的乐。由于从它生起、由它产生的极其殊胜的色法,那位具备禅那者的色身被遍满。因为色身被遍满,即使出定之后,具备禅那的人也能体验身体的乐。所以,为了说明这种被称为体验心乐与身乐的含义,连接起来说:“他以身体验乐。”这里的简要含义是:具备禅那的人以名身体验心乐,又通过生起作为身乐之因的色法而体验身乐,所以说“他以身体验乐”。“被遍满”就是被充满的意思。就像身体被水浸透的人,接触到风等并非极度相反的触时,乐就会生起;同样,身体被这些殊胜色法遍满的人也是如此。另一种解释:在“以身体验乐”这句话中,有人质问:“没有作意怎么会有乐的体验?”回答:“虽然……即便如此……”因为他的乐与名身相应,所以连接起来说“以身体验乐”。现在,为了说明即使有作意也有乐的体验,而说“或者那……”等。
Tasmā etamatthaṃ dassentoti yasmā tassa jhānasamaṅgino yaṃ nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃ so paṭisaṃvedeyya. Yaṃ vā tanti atha vā yaṃ taṃ yathāvuttaṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Taṃsamuṭṭhānena tato samuṭṭhitena atipaṇītena rūpena assa jhānasamaṅgino rūpakāyo yasmā phuṭo. Yassa rūpakāyassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi jhānasamaṅgī kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya. Tasmā etaṃ cetasikakāyikasukhapaṭisaṃvedanasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti āhā’’ti yojanā. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – nāmakāyena cetasikasukhaṃ, kāyikasukhaheturūpasamuṭṭhāpanena kāyikasukhañca jhānasamaṅgī paṭisaṃvedetīti vuccati. Phuṭattāti byāpitattāti attho. Yathā hi udakena phuṭasarīrassa tādise nātipaccanīke vātādiphoṭṭhabbe phuṭe sukhaṃ uppajjati, evametehi phuṭasarīrassāti. Aparo nayo – sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kathamābhogena vinā sukhapaṭisaṃvedanāti codanāyaṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi…pe… evaṃ santepī’’ti. Yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tasmā sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti yojanā. Idāni sahāpi ābhogena sukhapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ vā ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
86“Yaṃ”是表原因的不变词,意思是“因为”。所以说“因为那禅那之因”。“宣说”等词是称赞的意思,因此说“意思是称赞”。“如何”是询问称赞的方式。在这些地方,只要提到念,正知也就被包含在内了。这里巴利原文中只提到了念,所以仅就如此现起的念而说“具念者”;或者是因为前面已经说过“正知”。
86.Yanti hetuatthe nipāto, yasmāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃjhānahetū’’ti. ‘‘Ācikkhantī’’tiādīni padāni kittanatthānīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo’’ti. Kintīti pasaṃsanākārapucchā. Edisesu ṭhānesu satiggahaṇeneva sampajaññampi gahitaṃ hotīti idha pāḷiyaṃ satiyā eva gahitattā evaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitāya ‘‘satimā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, ‘‘sampajāno’’ti heṭṭhā vuttattā vā.
在禅那发生的那个刹那,只有心所生的乐受被体验到,所以才说“以名身感受乐”。从“第三”开始,按数目依次类推,从这里起,与第二禅、第三禅的解说没有差别,而差别之处也已经说过了。
Jhānakkhaṇe cetasikasukhameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tatiyantigaṇanānupubbatāti ito paṭṭhāya dutiyatatiyajjhānakathāhi aviseso, viseso ca vuttoti.
第四禅那的注释
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
87现在要显示所生起的差别,说了“然而这个差别”之后,又说“因为……”等话。它不以习行缘作为条件,因为在非所愿之处,被其他词所包含的法没有习行缘的性质。由于有殊胜的离乐修习,应与不苦不乐受俱生。“那些”是指安止路中的速行心而言。
87. Idāni nibbattitavisesaṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ pana viseso’’ti vatvā ‘‘yasmā’’tiādimāha. Āsevanapaccayena paccayo na hoti, aniṭṭhe ṭhāne padantarasaṅgahitassa āsevanapaccayattābhāvato. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya uppajjitabbaṃ sātisayaṃ sukhavirāgabhāvanābhāvato. Tānīti appanāvīthiyaṃ javanāni sandhāyāha.
88因为前面已经说了“先前”,就有人质问:那它们到底在什么时候被断除呢?回答是:在四种禅那的近行刹那。应当这样理解,这就是前后的关联。所谓断除的次第,就是能断之法生起的先后顺序。不过如果按这样说,就应该说“苦、忧、乐、喜”。为什么这里说法不一样呢?回答说:“在《根分别》中……”等等。那么,为什么只说到在禅那中灭呢?这就是前后的关联。
88.‘‘Pubbevā’’ti vuttattā kadā pana tesaṃ pahānaṃ hotīti codanāyaṃ āha ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe’’ti. Evaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Pahānakkamo nāma pahāyakadhammānaṃ uppattipaṭipāṭi. Tena pana vuccamāne ‘‘dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ sukhaṃ somanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā. Kasmā ito aññathā vacananti āha ‘‘indriyavibhaṅge’’tiādi. Atha kasmā jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti sambandho.
“苦根在哪里生起?”问的是由它自己的诸缘所生的苦根。“又在哪里无余灭尽?”问的是灭尽之处。因此,在“在哪里”的提问和“在这里”的回答中,应当理解为处格表示原因。因为以禅那的威力为因而未生起的,就说为“苦根无余灭尽”。最殊胜的灭就是彻底断除,以直接对治而止息。
Kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyanti attano paccayehi uppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ. Kattha ca aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhaṭṭhānaṃ pucchati. Tena ‘‘katthā’’ti pucchāyaṃ, ‘‘etthā’’ti vissajjanepi hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānānubhāvanimittaṃ hi anuppajjantaṃ ‘‘dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atisayanirodho suṭṭhu pahānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhena vūpasamo.
“不同转向”是指与产生安止路的那个转向不同的转向,或是多种转向。因为在安止路中,近行是单一转向,另一种则是多种转向,因为它多次生起。由不舒适的坐姿所产生的疲劳,就是不舒适坐姿带来的逼恼。“以喜遍满”是指以喜的遍满作用,或者说,由喜所生的殊胜色法遍布全身,因此说“全身都被乐浸透”。“即使寻伺为缘”中的“pi”字用错了位置,应当把它移到“已断除”那里,连成“即使已断除忧根”。意思是:这忧根会生起,这样就构成了关联。从“我过久地寻思、伺察时,身体也会疲劳,心也会被逼恼”这句话,应当知道身心疲劳是以寻伺为缘的。应当连起来理解为“当有寻伺时,忧根生起”。“在那里可能有它的生起”,意思是:在第二禅的近行阶段,那忧可能生起。
Nānāvajjaneti yena āvajjanena appanāvīthi, tato bhinnāvajjane, anekāvajjane vā. Appanāvīthiyañhi upacāro ekāvajjano, itaro anekāvajjano anekakkhattuṃ pavattanato. Visamanisajjāya uppannakilamatho visamāsanupatāpo. Pītipharaṇenāti pītiyā pharaṇarasattā, pītisamuṭṭhānānaṃ vā paṇītarūpānaṃ kāyassa byāpanato vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hotī’’ti. Vitakkavicārapaccayepīti pi-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, so ‘‘pahīnassā’’ti ettha ānetvā sambandhitabbo ‘‘pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassā’’ti. Etaṃ domanassindriyaṃ uppajjatīti sambandho. ‘‘Tassa mayhaṃ aticiraṃ vitakkayato vicārayato kāyopi kilamicittampi uhaññī’’ti vacanato kāyacittakhedānaṃ vitakkavicārappaccayatā veditabbā . ‘‘Vitakkavicārabhāve uppajjati domanassindriya’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tatthassa siyā uppattīti tattha dutiyajjhānūpacāre assa domanassassa uppatti bhaveyya.
在这里,有人这样说:“他那里可能有生起”,这种说法就显示出:即使证得禅那的人,也会有忧生起。而通过这一点,也说明嗔和贪一样,其本性并不是盖。因为如果没有嗔,忧就不会生起。这里不应该去想这和《发趣论》的经文有冲突。因为那里说的是以退失的禅那为所缘而生起的忧,而以未退失的禅那为所缘,忧是不可能生起的。但也不能说证得禅那的人完全不会生起忧,因为即使证得八等至的人,那种忧也会生起。不过,他们并不是说那个人是已断禅那的人,这是不合理的,因为嗔的本性并不是盖。如果嗔是盖,那么色界和无色界的有情也应该会生起忧,但实际上并不会生起。就像在“在无色界,缘欲贪盖而有惛沉睡眠盖、掉举盖、无明盖”等说法中,并没有举出嗔恚盖和恶作盖。这里也不能因为是盖就回避,因为欲贪等也是以非盖而类似盖的方式,被称为盖的异名。至于说“即使证得八等至的人,那种忧也会生起”,这也不能成立,因为生起的忧会使他从禅那退失。应当知道,因轻微的因缘而退失禅那的人,能毫不费力地使它恢复如初。而“他那里可能有生起”这句话是假设的说法,是为了显示在近行刹那,忧还没有被断除。正如所说“但绝不是在内住安止中”。如果那时忧会生起,就应当知道他的初禅也已经退失了。已断除的悦受根,就像喜一样,并不是远离了,所以说“因为接近”。在种种转向和近行中,已断除的支分虽然没有被对治所摧毁,但可能间或生起,为了说明这个意思,所以说“已达安止”等。因为那样的随顺是应该希求的,就像在道路之前有两三次速行以相似观生起,这里也一样,在安止之前有两三次速行,唯与舍俱行。
Ettha ca yadeke ‘‘tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti vadantena jhānalābhīnampi domanussuppatti atthīti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena ca anīvaraṇasabhāvo lobho viya dosopi atthīti dīpeti. Na hi dosena vinā domanassaṃ pavattati. Na cettha paṭṭhānapāḷiyā virodho cintetabbo. Yasmā tattha parihīnaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ domanassaṃ dassitaṃ, aparihīnajjhānamārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānassa domanassassa asambhavato. Jhānalābhīnaṃ sabbaso domanassaṃ nuppajjatīti ca na sakkā vattuṃ, aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā. Na heva kho so pahīnajjhāno ahosīti vadanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ anīvaraṇasabhāvassa dosassa abhāvato. Yadi siyā, rūpārūpāvacarasattānampi uppajjeyya, na ca uppajjati. Tathā hi ‘‘arūpe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇa’’ntiādīsu byāpādakukkuccanīvaraṇāni anuddhaṭāni. Na cettha nīvaraṇattā parihāro, kāmacchandādīnampi anīvaraṇānaṃyeva nīvaraṇasadisatāya nīvaraṇapariyāyassa vuttattā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā’’ti, tampi akāraṇaṃ uppajjamānena ca domanassena jhānato parihāyanato. Lahukena pana paccayena parihīnaṃ tādisā appakasireneva paṭipākatikaṃ karontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti idaṃ pana parikappavacanaṃ upacārakkhaṇe domanassassa appahīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na tveva antoappanāya’’nti. Yadi pana tadā domanassaṃ uppajjeyya, paṭhamajjhānampissa parihīnamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pahīnampi somanassindriyaṃ pīti viya na dūreti katvā ‘‘āsannattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nānāvajjanūpacāre pahīnampi pahānaṅgaṃ paṭipakkhena avihatattā antarantarā uppajjeyya vāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘appanāppattāyā’’tiādimāha. Tādisāya āsevanāya icchitabbattā yathā maggavīthito pubbe dve tayo javanavārā sadisānupassanāva pavattanti, evamidhāpi appanāvārato pubbe dve tayo javanavārā upekkhāsahagatāva pavattantīti vadanti.
Samāhaṭā(汇集)的意思是“被归纳到一起”,也就是总括起来说。Sukhadukkhāni(苦与乐)犹如苦乐,因不粗重、不明显,所以微细。正因如此,其自性只能靠推测,所以难以了知。Duṭṭhassa指邪加行者,意思是难以调伏的人。这段话的意思是:这个微细的法,可以通过排除其他法的方式被把握。
Samāhaṭāti samānītā, saṅgahetvā vuttāti attho. Sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikattā avibhūtatāya sukhumā. Tato eva anuminitabbasabhāvattā duviññeyyā. Duṭṭhassāti duṭṭhapayogassa, duddammassāti attho. Sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ aññāpohananayenāti adhippāyo.
不苦不乐心解脱,应当看作就是第四禅。显示缘,是为了显示作为证悟方法的缘。因此说“因为断苦等是它的缘”。而这里说的“断苦等”,指的是连同近行在内的初禅等。
Adukkhamasukhāyacetovimuttiyāti idameva catutthajjhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccayadassanatthanti adhigamassa upāyabhūtapaccayadassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā’’ti. Dukkhappahānādayoti ca sopacārā paṭhamajjhānādayovettha adhippetā.
这里说的“已断除”,是依据“五下分结彻底灭尽”而说的。“这些”指的是乐受等受。
Pahīnāti vuttā ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti. Etāti sukhādayo vedanā.
喜是贪的缘。正如所说:“毗舍佉贤友,对乐受,贪随眠确实潜伏。”忧是嗔的缘。这也如所说:“毗舍佉贤友,对苦受,嗔恚随眠确实潜伏。”通过乐等的断除,即通过断除乐等。指此禅那的。
Somanassaṃ rāgassa paccayo. Vuttañhi ‘‘sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Domanassaṃ dosassa paccayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dukkhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti. Sukhādighātenāti sukhādīnaṃ pahānena. Assa jhānassa.
不苦就是无苦,远离苦。因为在那里没有苦,所以说“由于无苦”。“不乐”这里也是同样的道理。“以此”是指通过否定苦与乐的这句话。“成为对立面”在这里是说,第三受由于超越苦等而应当被证得,所以这样说,并不是像善与不善那样直接相反。以与可意、不可意相反的对象为所缘,或者以中舍的方式体验与可意、不可意相反的状态,就是体验与可意、不可意相反的特征。正因如此,它的作用是中舍。它现起时不明显,就是说它不像乐和苦那样以明显的形态出现,就像石板上的鹿迹一样,要靠它们来推断,是以不明显的形态现起。这里所说的“乐灭”是指第四禅的近行定,那是它的立足处,所以说是以乐灭为立足处。
Na dukkhanti adukkhaṃ, dukkhavidhuraṃ. Yasmā tattha dukkhaṃ natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhābhāvenā’’ti. Asukhanti etthapi eseva nayo. Etenāti dukkhasukhapaṭikkhepavacanena. ‘‘Paṭipakkhabhūta’’nti idaṃ idha tatiyavedanāya dukkhādīnaṃ samatikkamavasena pattabbattā vuttaṃ, na kusalākusalānaṃ viya ujuvipaccanīkatāya. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītassa majjhattārammaṇassa, iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītaṃ vā majjhattākārena anubhavanalakkhaṇā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā. Tato eva majjhattarasā. Avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānāti sukhadukkhāni viya na vibhūtākārā , piṭṭhipāsāṇe migagatamaggo viya tehi anumātabbā avibhūtākāropaṭṭhānā. Sukhanirodho nāma idha catutthajjhānūpacāro, so padaṭṭhānaṃ etissāti sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānā.
89对于“舍念清净”这个说法,前一个词省略了后一个词,所以这是一个复合词,因此说“由舍所生的念清净”。在第四禅中,当舍清净对一切敌对法都清净、即使在息灭敌对法时也不介入,念就如同令欢喜的慧一样,变得极其清净、极其明净,所以说“这种念的清净是由舍造成的,不是由别的什么造成的”。如果这里说的“舍”是指中舍性,那为什么只说念是“清净”的呢?因此说“不只是”等等。
89.‘‘Upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti purimapade uttarapadalopenetaṃ samāsapadanti āha ‘‘upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhi’’nti. Sabbapaccanīkadhammaparisuddhāya paccanīkasamanepi abyāvaṭāya pārisuddhiupekkhāya vattamānāya catutthajjhāne sati sampahaṃsanapaññā viya suparisuddhā, suvisadā ca hotīti āha ‘‘yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññenā’’ti. Yadi tatramajjhattatā idha ‘‘upekkhā’’ti adhippetā, kathaṃ satiyeva ‘‘parisuddhā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi.
同样地,为什么只有这个念被称为“舍念清净”呢?针对这个追问,就说了“其中虽然……”等话。其中,在下三禅里虽然也有中舍性,但因为被对立面所压伏,又缺少助伴的条件,所以不清净;与它相应的心所也一样不清净。到了第四禅,因为不再有这些不清净,所以这里才叫清净。为了用比喻说明这个意思,就说了“然而犹如……”等话。“被日光所掩”是指被日光压过。夜也如月轮般具有柔和的性质,与它同类的夜中,月轮才格外明亮;为了说明那夜与它同类,就说“以柔和的性质,或者因为对自己有助益,所以与相应的夜”。
Evampi kasmā ayameva sati ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhī’’ti vuttāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha heṭṭhā tīsu jhānesu vijjamānāyapi tatramajjhattatāya paccanīkābhibhavato, sahāyapaccayavekallato ca apārisuddhi, tathā taṃsampayuttānaṃ. Tadabhāvato idha pārisuddhīti imamatthaṃ rūpakavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sūriyappabhābhibhavāti sūriyappabhāya abhibhuyyamānattā. Atikkhatāya candalekhā viya rattipi sommasabhāvā sabhāgāya rattiyameva ca candalekhā samujjalatīti sā tassā sabhāgāti dassento ‘‘sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā’’ti āha.
“单一路”这个说法,是因为喜在这里完全不存在才说的,并不是因为它在之前的那些阶段里完全存在。然而,为了说明这一点才这样说:就像寻等是在第二禅等禅那的刹那才被断除,而不是在单一路的前几个速行心里就被断除,但这里的喜并不是那样。“于四禅”是指按四禅的方式所生起的四种禅那。
‘‘Ekavīthiya’’nti idaṃ tattha somanassassa ekaṃsena abhāvato vuttaṃ, na tato purimataresu ekaṃsena bhāvato. Yathā pana vitakkādayo dutiyādijjhānakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, na tesaṃ ekavīthiyaṃ purimajavanesu, na evametanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Catukkajjhāneti catukkanayavasena nibbattitajjhānacatukke.
五禅那论的注释
Pañcakajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
90这里说的“其中”是指初禅。“像四禅体系里的第二禅那样”,意思是像属于四禅体系的第二禅那样。把它分成两种,就是按四禅体系把第二禅分成“无寻有伺”和“无寻无伺”这两种,这样在五禅体系里就成了第二禅和第三禅——这是阿毗达摩的意旨。不过在经典中,五禅体系并没有按其本来面貌被采用。
90.Tatthāti paṭhamajjhāne. Catukkanayassa dutiyajjhāne viyāti catukkanayasambandhini dutiyajjhāne viya. Taṃ dvidhā bhinditvāti catukkanaye dutiyaṃ ‘‘avitakkaṃ vicāramattaṃ, avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti ca evaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā pañcakanaye dutiyañceva tatiyañca hoti abhidhammeti (dha. sa. 168) adhippāyo. Suttantesu pana sarūpato pañcakanayo na gahito.
那么,为什么这里要采用两种分类方式呢?因为在阿毗达摩中,诸禅那本来就是按两种方式来说的。那又为什么在那里要那样说呢?是因为众生的意乐不同,也因为说法善巧的缘故。据说,在聚集的天众当中,有些人按照所教导的,觉得初禅里的寻很粗显,其余的心所则觉得是寂静的。于是随顺他们的意乐,就说了四支的、无寻只有伺的禅那。有些人觉得伺粗显,有些人觉得喜粗显,有些人觉得乐粗显,其余的心所则觉得是寂静的。于是随顺他们各自的意乐,就说了第三禅等。这就是众生的意乐。
Kasmā panettha nayadvayavibhāgo gahitoti? Abhidhamme nayadvayavasena jhānānaṃ desitattā. Kasmā ca tattha tathā tāni desitāni? Puggalajjhāsayato, desanāvilāsato ca. Sannipatitadevaparisāya kira yesaṃ yathādesite paṭhamajjhāne vitakko eva oḷārikato upaṭṭhāsi, itare santato. Tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena ca caturaṅgikaṃ avitakkaṃ vicāramattaṃ jhānaṃ desitaṃ. Yesaṃ vicāro, yesaṃ pīti, yesaṃ sukhaṃ oḷārikato upaṭṭhāsi, itare santato. Tesaṃ tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena tatiyādīni jhānāni desitāni. Ayaṃ tāva puggalajjhāsayo.
世尊因为彻底通达法界,所以成就了说法的善巧。由于智慧广大,他在说法上极为善巧,无论得到哪一支,都能随其所宜地依那一支来安立教说:或者按四禅的方式,或者按五禅的方式。其中,他教导了五支的第一禅、四支的第二禅、三支的第三禅、二支的第四禅,以及同样二支的第五禅,这就是说法的善巧。
在这里,五禅方式中的第二禅,在四禅方式中被归入第二禅的范畴来分别说明,如说“当为生于色界而修习道时,成就无寻、仅有伺、由定所生、有喜与乐的第二禅而住”。为什么?因为“一身异想有情居”的果报与第二禅的果报相同,而且是从初禅定生起的。初禅确实是“远离诸欲、远离不善法”,因为这里没有那些,所以不能说“远离诸欲、远离不善法”,也不能说“离生”。在经教中,五禅方式的第二禅和第三禅其实都归入第二禅,因为寻已止息、伺已止息,所以是无寻、无伺。这样,经教中也能成立五禅方式,这个道理就成立了。
难道经中不是只分别了四种禅那,所以五禅方式不可得吗?不是的,因为依“有寻有伺定”等三种定的施设,五禅方式是可以得到的。不过,五禅方式是依四禅方式而被分别的,所以在经教中也应当确定五禅方式。因为“寻伺止息”这句话,可以指寻的止息、伺的止息,也可以指寻与伺两者的止息。同样,“无寻、无伺”也可以有三种情况:不与伺俱及与伺俱断寻,成为无寻;与寻俱及不与寻俱断伺,成为无伺;以及既无寻又无伺。
Yassā pana dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā bhagavā yasmā desanāvilāsappatto, tasmā ñāṇamahantatāya desanāya sukusalo yaṃ yaṃ aṅgaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa vasena yathāruciṃ desanaṃ niyāmento catukkanayavasena, pañcakanayavasena ca. Tattha ca pañcaṅgikaṃ paṭhamaṃ, caturaṅgikaṃ dutiyaṃ, tivaṅgikaṃ tatiyaṃ, duvaṅgikaṃ catutthaṃ, duvaṅgikameva pañcamaṃ jhānaṃ desesīti ayaṃ desanāvilāso. Ettha ca pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānaṃ catukkanaye dutiyajjhānapakkhikaṃ katvā vibhattaṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti avitakkaṃ vicāramattaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 168). Kasmā? Ekattakāyanānattasaññīsattāvāsaphalatāya dutiyajjhānena samānaphalattā, paṭhamajjhānasamādhito jātattā ca. Paṭhamajjhānameva hi ‘‘kāmehi akusalehi ca vivitta’’nti tadabhāvā na idha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehī’’ti sakkā vattuṃ, nāpi ‘‘vivekaja’’nti. Suttantadesanāsu ca pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānāni dutiyajjhānameva bhajanti vitakkavūpasamā vicāravūpasamā avitakkattā, avicārattā ca. Evañca katvā suttantadesanāyapi pañcakanayo labbhatevāti siddhaṃ hoti. Nanu suttante cattāriyeva jhānāni vibhattānīti pañcakanayo na labbhatīti? Na, ‘‘savitakkasavicāro samādhī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.305) samādhittayāpadesena pañcakanayassa labbhamānattā. Catukkanayanissito pana katvā pañcakanayo vibhattoti suttantadesanāyapi pañcakanayo niddhāretabbo. ‘‘Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti hi vitakkassa, vicārassa, vitakkavicārānañca ‘‘vitakkavicārāna’’nti sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā ‘‘avitakkaṃ, avicāra’’nti ca vinā, saha ca vicārena vitakkappahānena avitakkaṃ, saha, vinā ca vitakkena vicārappahānena avicāranti avitakkaṃ, avicāraṃ, avitakkañca avicārañcāti vā tividhampi sakkā saṅgahetuṃ.
所谓“第二”,是指在无寻以及无寻无伺这两种情况下,依理趣而说的开示,因为应当证得第二禅;即使在只有伺而无寻的情况下,也因为断除这两者而证得的法性相同,所以也称为第二。这样理解之后,在五禅体系的说明中,第二禅里虽然寻已经寂止,但因为作为助伴的伺还没有寂止,所以不算真正寂止;就像在无寻无伺时,只有通过伺的寂止才能显示其寂止,并显示其余诸法的相同性一样,因此说:“由寻与伺的寂止,内心清净,心专一,无寻无伺,定生喜乐,成就并住于第三禅。”这是在四禅体系中,与第二禅没有差别地加以分别说明的。在两种情况下,都是因为没有了助伴,以及以另一种方式——通过断除寻而成为无寻,并且定生喜乐也相同,所以因为法性相同而称为“第二”。即使在只有伺而无寻的情况下,也像无寻无伺时那样,被分别说明为“无寻、定生喜乐”,如说:“在某个时候,为了生于色界而修习道,无寻有伺,定生喜乐,成就并住于第二禅。”(《法集论》168)在初禅中,或者对于同时生起的寻和伺,超越其中一个而安住于彼处,见到其过患之后,同时超越两者的,在五禅体系中称为第三禅,因为应当证得第三禅。然而,它因为从初禅无间而生起,所以具有第二禅的性质。为什么五禅体系不按它们各自的体性来分别说明呢?是因为所化众生的意乐不同。随顺他们意乐的开示,就是经教的开示。
Dutiyanti ca vitakkarahite, vitakkavicāradvayarahite ca ñāyāgatā desanā dutiyaṃ adhigantabbattā, vicāramattarahitepi dvayappahānādhigatasamānadhammattā. Evañca katvā pañcakanayaniddese dutiye vūpasantopi vitakko sahāyabhūtavicārāvūpasamena na sammā vūpasantoti vitakkavicāradvayarahite viya vicāravūpasameneva tadupasamaṃ, sesadhammānaṃ samānatañca dassentena ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti tatiyaṃ catukkanaye dutiyena nibbisesaṃ vibhattaṃ. Duvidhassāpi sahāyavirahena, aññathā ca vitakkappahānena avitakkattaṃ, samādhijaṃ pītisukhattañca samānanti samānadhammattāpi dutiyanti niddeso . Vicāramattampi hi vitakkavicāradvayarahitaṃ viya ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti avitakkaṃ vicāramattaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 168) avitakkaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhanti vibhattaṃ. Paṭhamajjhāne vā sahacārīsu vitakkavicāresu ekaṃ atikkamitvā dutiyampi tatraṭṭhameva dosato disvā ubhayampi sahātikkamantassa pañcakanaye tatiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tatiyaṃ adhigantabbattā. Paṭhamato anantarabhāvena panassa dutiyabhāvo ca uppajjatīti. Kasmā panevaṃ sarūpato pañcakanayo na vibhattoti? Vineyyajjhāsayato. Yathānulomadesanā hi suttantadesanāti.